manga studio user manual

7/28/2019 Manga Studio User Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/manga-studio-user-manual 1/415



Layer File .................................................................................................41

Image File ................................................................................................42

Photohop file (EX only) ...........................................................................46

TWAIN .....................................................................................................47

Continuou scan (EX only) ........................................................................48

Image File ................................................................................................50

save Page Template ................................................................................55

save material (EX only) ...........................................................................56

Page etting ...........................................................................................62

Print setup ...............................................................................................62

Printing ....................................................................................................63

Rater Drawing ........................................................................................66

Vector Drawing (EX only) ..........................................................................66

Anti-Aliaed Drawing/Diplay(EX only) ......................................................67

showing the Center Line (EX only) ............................................................67

Drawing Color[Monochrome](Black/White/Tranparent).............................68

Drawing Color [Gray] ................................................................................70

Drawing Color [Color]...............................................................................73

Tool Uage ...............................................................................................76

Pen Tool ...................................................................................................78

In/Out/Correction ......................................................................................80

Note .......................................................................................................80

Bruh Control ...........................................................................................81

Eraer Tool ...............................................................................................82

Magic Marker Marker Tool ........................................................................84

Pencil Tool ................................................................................................86

Calligraphy Pen (EX only) ..........................................................................88

Pattern Bruh Tool ....................................................................................90

Eyedropper Tool (EX only) .........................................................................93Fill Tool ....................................................................................................94

Fill Cloed Area Tool (EX only) ...................................................................96

Line Tool ..................................................................................................98

Curve Tool ................................................................................................98

Polyline Tool ...........................................................................................100

Rectangle, Ellipe, and Polygon Tool.......................................................102

Ruler Baic............................................................................................106Object selector Tool ................................................................................112

Ruler Operation ....................................................................................113

Step: 03 Shortcut preferences (For EX only)

Step: 02 Preferences

Step: 04 Custom Tool Settings (For EX only)

Step: 02 Page operation

Step: 03 Page

Step: 04 Import

Chapter: 01

Chapter 1 - Getting Started

Step: 01 Startup and shutdown

Chapter: 02

Chapter 2 - Files

Step: 01 File Operations

Step: 05 Export

Step: 06 Save

Step: 07 Printing

Step: 02 Drawing Color

Step: 03 Drawing

Chapter: 03

Chapter 3 - Drawing

Step: 01 Drawing Format

Chapter: 04

Chapter 4 - Rulers

Step: 01 Rulers

Before reading thi manual .........................................................................6

startup Manga studio. ...............................................................................8

shutdown Manga studio. ..........................................................................8

Initialization startup. .................................................................................9

story ........................................................................................................10

Page ........................................................................................................10

Page: Curor ............................................................................................11

Page: Magnification Angle ........................................................................12

Page: Ruler...............................................................................................12

Page: Panel setting .................................................................................13

Layer ........................................................................................................13

Tool .........................................................................................................14

Printing scanning .....................................................................................14

Memory ...................................................................................................15

Tablet.......................................................................................................15

Folder Path ...............................................................................................16

Option ....................................................................................................16

Export & Import........................................................................................17

shortcut preference baic ........................................................................18

Cutom tool preference baic ..................................................................19

Regarding File Type .................................................................................22

Regarding file compatibility ......................................................................23

Create New File .......................................................................................24

saving a File .............................................................................................30

Open File ................................................................................................32

Open Page and Cloe Page .......................................................................33

To Next Page and To Previou Page ...........................................................33

Clear Page and Delete Page ......................................................................34

Inert Page ...............................................................................................34

Copy Page................................................................................................35

Open two page pread, open ingle page (EX only) ...................................36

Page diplay .............................................................................................36

Change Title Information .......................................................................... 38

Modify Binding Poition/ start Page Changing .....................................................38

Change Page Format Guide ......................................................................39

Page File ..................................................................................................40

Multi-layer file ........................................................................................41



Bezier Curve Ruler Baic........................................................................115

Create Path Tool (EX only) ......................................................................116

Perpective Ruler (EX only)......................................................................121

Radial Line Ruler (EX only) ....................................................................124

Radial Curve Ruler (EX only) ...................................................................125

Parallel Line Ruler (EX only) ...................................................................126Concentric Circle Ruler (EX only) .............................................................127

symmetry Ruler (EX only) ........................................................................128

symmetry Ruler baic (EX only)..............................................................128

Panel Ruler Baic ..................................................................................131

Panel Ruler Cutter Tool ...........................................................................136

Ruler Editing ..........................................................................................137

Align Ruler ...........................................................................................143

Layer Baic ...........................................................................................146

Layer Type.............................................................................................147

Layer select tool .....................................................................................153

Layer Move Tool .....................................................................................154Creating New Layer ..............................................................................155

selecting Layer......................................................................................155

selecting Multiple Layer ........................................................................155

Layer Duplication ...................................................................................156

Deleting a Layer .....................................................................................156

Converting Layer to a Folder .................................................................157

Layer Type Change .................................................................................158

Merging Layer ......................................................................................161

show/Hide Layer ....................................................................................162

Changing the Order of Layer .................................................................162Diplaying the Layer Diviion ..................................................................163

Changing the Layer Palette Color ............................................................163

Panel Folder Baic .................................................................................164

Panel Creation Tool ................................................................................166

selection Baic ......................................................................................168

Rectangle selection Tool .........................................................................170

Ellipe selection Tool ..............................................................................170

Lao selection Tool................................................................................171

Polyline selection Tool ............................................................................171

Magic Marker Wand Tool ........................................................................173

Type of Tool Option .............................................................................174

Create a selection ..................................................................................180

Edit a selection ......................................................................................183

selection Launcher .................................................................................186

selection Layer Baic .............................................................................187

selection Layer Operation .......................................................................188Quick Mak (EX only) .............................................................................191

Quick select (EX) ....................................................................................192

select a Vector Line ................................................................................193

Tone Baic ............................................................................................196Gradation Tool (EX only) .........................................................................200

Tone Editing ...........................................................................................202

searching Tone .....................................................................................210

Creating Original Tone ..........................................................................210

Tone setting .........................................................................................214

Managing Tone .....................................................................................217

Computone Baic ................................................................................218

Decription of Computone Function .....................................................220

Key Combination ....................................................................................223

Cutting ..................................................................................................226

Copying .................................................................................................226

Copying to another Application ..............................................................227

Pating ...................................................................................................228

Pating with Tranparent White ...............................................................228

Pating with Opaque Color (32-Bit Only) .................................................229

Line-Joining Tool ....................................................................................230

Line Level Tool (EX only) .........................................................................232

Width Changing Tool (EX only) ...............................................................233

Edit Lining Tool (EX only) ........................................................................234

Baic of Moving and Tranforming .........................................................235

Type of Moving and Tranformation .......................................................237

Ditortion Tool (EX only) .........................................................................239

speed Line Tool (EX only) ......................................................................241

Dut Filtering Tool (EX only) ....................................................................242

Blurring Tool (EX only) ............................................................................243

Step: 02 Bezier Curve Ruler (EX only)

Step: 03 Special Ruler (EX only)

Step: 04 Panel Ruler

Step: 05 Edit・Align Rulers

Step: 02 Using Layers

Step: 03 Displaying Layers

Step: 04 Panel Folder

Chapter: 05

Chapter 5 - Layers

Step: 01 Layers

Chapter: 06

Chapter 6 - Selection

Step: 01 Selection

Step: 02 Convert a Selection to a Layer

Step: 03 Select a Vector Line (EX only)

Step: 02 Computones (EX only)

Step: 03 Move and Transform

Step: 04 Retouching

Chapter: 07

Chapter 7 - Tone

Step: 01 Manga Studio Screen Tones

Chapter: 08

Chapter 8 - Editing

Step: 01 Cut and Paste

Step: 02 Edit Lines



stamping Tool (EX only) ..........................................................................244

Color Mixing Tool (EX only) .....................................................................246

Dodging Tool (EX only) ...........................................................................247

Burning Tool (EX only) ............................................................................248

Revere Layer .........................................................................................249

Making Layer (such a Panel Folder) ......................................................250

Filter .....................................................................................................254

Vanihing Point .....................................................................................256

Focu Line.............................................................................................257

speed Line ............................................................................................258

Cloud Pattern (EX only) ..........................................................................260

Lightning Bolt (EX only) ..........................................................................260

Polar Coordinate (EX only) ....................................................................262

Wave (EX only) .......................................................................................263

Waveform (EX only) ..............................................................................264

spiral (EX only) .......................................................................................265

Zigzag (EX only) .....................................................................................265

Brightne and Contrast (EX only) ..................................................................................266

Tone Curve (EX only) ..............................................................................267Level Adjutment (EX only) .....................................................................268

Hue/saturation/Value (EX only) ...............................................................269

Bitmap (EX only) ....................................................................................270

Dut Filter (EX only) ................................................................................271

Edit Line (EX only) ..................................................................................272

Change Width (EX only) ..........................................................................273

Moaic (EX only) ....................................................................................274sharpen (EX only) / .................................................................................274

sharpen (Heavy)(EX only)........................................................................274

Poterization (EX only) ............................................................................275

Invert Tone (EX only)...............................................................................275

Blur (EX only) .........................................................................................276

Blur (Heavy) (EX only) .............................................................................276

Gauian Blur (EX only) ..........................................................................276

Radial Blur (EX only) ...............................................................................277

Motion Blur (EX only) .............................................................................278

sparkle (EX only) ....................................................................................279

soft Focu (EX only) ................................................................................280

Pattern (EX only) ...................................................................................281

Random Grid Pattern (EX only) ...............................................................282

Rain (EX only) ........................................................................................283

2D Rotate (EX only) ................................................................................284

Pinch (EX only) .......................................................................................285

speed Rotation (EX only) ........................................................................286

Ditorted Focu Line (EX only) ...............................................................287

Ditorted speed Line (EX only)...............................................................288spherical (EX only) .................................................................................289

Fiheye Len (EX only) ............................................................................290

2DLT Rendering Function ........................................................................292

2DLT setting ...........................................................................................295

Preproceing Filter ................................................................................299

Move and Tranform ...............................................................................299

Baic of the 3Dsketching Function .........................................................300

supported 3D data .................................................................................302

3D Frame Tool ........................................................................................304

3D selection Tool....................................................................................305

Manipulating 3D Object ........................................................................306

Camera Operation .................................................................................310

Diplay Adjutment .................................................................................312

3D space Ruler .....................................................................................316

Baic of 3D Human model ...................................................................318

saving Poe and scene ........................................................................320

3DLT Rendering Function Baic ..............................................................322

3DLT setting .........................................................................................324

Four View .............................................................................................327

Text function baic ................................................................................330

Text tool .................................................................................................330Text preference .....................................................................................332

Ruby etting (EX only) ...........................................................................333

style etting (EX only) ...........................................................................336

Import text (EX only) ..............................................................................339

Export text (EX only) ...............................................................................340

story editor (EX only) ..............................................................................341

Balloon function baic ...........................................................................346

Create balloon (EX only) .......................................................................347

Step: 05 Black-White Reversal and Masking

Step: 02 Rendering Filters

Step: 03 Transform Filters

Step: 04 Image Adjustment Filters (EX only)

Step: 05 Line Adjustment Filters (EX only)

Step: 06 Effect Filters (EX only)

Chapter: 09

Chapter 9 - Filters

Step: 01 Filters

Step: 07 Blur Filters (EX only)

Step: 08 Drawing (Comic Filters Vol. 1) (EX only)

Chapter: 11

Chapter 11 - Text and Word Balloons

Step: 01 Text

Chapter: 10

Chapter 10 - Rendering

Step: 01 2DLT (EX only)

Step: 09 Distort (EX only)

Step: 02 3D Sketching (EX only)

Step: 03 3DLT (EX only)

Step: 02 Word Balloons

Chapter: 12

Chapter 12 - Display and Windows

Step: 01 Screen Display



screen Diplay Baic..............................................................................354

Hand Tool ..............................................................................................354

Rotate Tool ............................................................................................355

Bug Glae Tool ....................................................................................356

screen Rotation ......................................................................................357

screen Inverion .....................................................................................357

Actual Pixel ..........................................................................................358

show All ................................................................................................358

Print size................................................................................................359

show Tranparent Area ...........................................................................359

New Window .........................................................................................360

show Meaurement scale ......................................................................361

show Print Guide and Baic Frame ..........................................................361

show Guide ...........................................................................................362

show Grid ..............................................................................................362

show story and Author Info ....................................................................363

show Page Number ................................................................................363

Diplay Pagination ..................................................................................363

Material baic .....................................................................................366

External browing ..................................................................................367

Character baic (EX only) ......................................................................368

Undoing command (Undo) ....................................................................370Redo command (Redo) ...........................................................................370

Hitory function ......................................................................................371

Action baic ........................................................................................372

File Menu ...............................................................................................378Edit Menu ..............................................................................................379

story Menu ............................................................................................380

View Menu ............................................................................................381

selection Menu ......................................................................................382

Layer Menu ..........................................................................................383

Ruler Menu ............................................................................................384

Filter Menu ............................................................................................385

Window Menu .......................................................................................386

Help Menu .............................................................................................387

Edit Window ..........................................................................................388

Tool Bar .................................................................................................389

Tool Palette ..........................................................................................390

Tool Option Palette ..............................................................................391

Layer Palette .........................................................................................392

Navigator Palette ...................................................................................393

Material Palette ....................................................................................394

Propertie Palette ...................................................................................395

Hitory Palette ........................................................................................395

Color Palette ..........................................................................................396

Cutomize Tool Palette (EX only) ...........................................................396

Action Palette (EX only) ..........................................................................396

Beginner' Aitant ...............................................................................397

Step: 02 Show Guidelines

Step: 03 Show Information

Step: 03 Actions (EX only)

Chapter: 13

Chapter 13 - Other

Step: 01 Materials (For EX only)

Chapter: 14

Chapter 14 - Features Reference

Step: 01 Menus

Chapter: 15

Chapter 15 - Appendix

Step: 01 Troubleshooting

Step: 02 Glossary

Step: 02 Undoing commands

Step: 02 Windows Palette



Before reading this manual

■Getting StartedThis manual assumes the reader understands the following basic operations:

・PC startup and shutdown process

・Basic mouse operations (click, double click, drag, etc)

・Basic File Operations (creating folders, moving files, copying, deleting, etc)

・Basic PC knowledge (hard disc, monitor, sort)

・Basic computer graphics and printing knowledge

For further information on these items, refer to the manuals which came with your computer, or a book on basic computer functions.

■ About「Product Lineup」

Manga Studio Ver. 4. 0 has two versions: Debut and EX, both of which are covered in this manual. The limitations of each version are indicated as follows:

・Debut

Indicates the functionalities included in Manga Studio Debut.

・EX

Indicates the functionalities included in Manga Studio EX.

■ About 「Point」

At the end of certain paragraphs, there are further explanations regarding the operation. They are labeled with the following title:

・Explanation

Convenient things to know or an explanation to increase understanding.

・Applied Operations

Introduction of applied operations to increase Manga studio use and increase efficiency when working.

・Note

These note areas in which mistakes easily occur or where added care need be taken.



第2

章

第1 章

第 3 章

第4 章

第 5 章

Getting Started

Chapter 1

This chapter is about starting up and shutting down Manga Studio and customizing for advanced users.

Step: 01 startup and shutdown 008

Step: 02 Preference 010

Step: 03 shortcut Preference (For EX only) 019

C h a p t e r 1

G e t t i n g S t a r t e d

Step: 04 Cutom Tool setting(For EX only) 020



Manga Studio

8

:

Manga Studio

Startup and shutdown01

Startup Manga Studio. 1. Select Shutdown Option

From the [File] menu, elect [Exit].

2. Shutdown Will be Complete.

The Manga studio application will hutdown.

1. Open Start Menu

select Manga studio by electing from the Window [start] Menu [All Program]

Shutdown Manga Studio.

・[standard Interface] i the tandard interface which previou uer will be ued to.

・[Beginner' aitant] i an interface for beginner where all neceary tool for

ketching, inerting pen, etc are viible one pace.

Explanation

4. Complete startup

After electing the UI with the [Select Default UI Mode] prompt box, Manga

studio will tart.

3. Select User Interface (On first startup only)

After intallation a [select Default UI Mode] prompt box will be diplayed,

where you can elect your preferred UI mode for Manga studio tart up.

1 select either the [Ue The standard Interface] or [Ue The Beginner’ Aitant] option.

3 Click the [OK] button.

3

1

2. Select Start Menu (Initial startup only)

On the initial tartup only, a [Intalling Material] prompt box will be diplayed.

Follow the intruction to intall the material.



UserGuide

9

C h a p t e r

1

G e t t i n g S t a r

t e d

When there i a problem with Manga studio, initialize tartup and return Manga

studio to original etting.

Initialization Startup.

The item elected from the [Initialize tartup] prompt box will be returned pot-

intallation tatu, and have all preference deleted. Alo note that all created item

will be deleted.

NOTE

3. Select items to be deleted from the [Initialization Start-up] promptbox. These selections will have their current preferences reset to the

time of installation. Then click the [OK] button.

2. Confirmation prompt box will be displayed

When the confirmation prompt box i diplayed, click [Ye].

1. Open Start Menu

From the Window [start] Menu [All Program] select Manga Studios while

holding down the [Shift] key.

4. Initialization Startup Complete

The item elected in the [Initialization start-up] dialog will be returned to theoriginal etting and the Manga studio application will tartup.



Manga Studio

10

StoryConfigure the preference for the [story] tab from the [Preference] window.

Operation At Startup

Configure tartup preference for the [story] file.

・[Create New Story]

Create a new [story] file upon tartup.

・[New Story Settings...]

Configure preference for the newly created [story] file.

・[Open Story That Was Last Opened] Open the lat file that wa in ue.

・[Conduct No Operation]

Do not create a [story] file when tarting up.

Page Thumbnail Quality

set the reolution and image quality of thumbnail diplayed on the [Edit]

window’ [story] tab.

・[Resolution]

select whether to diplay thumbnail on the [Edit] window’ [story] tab in

[standard] or [High] reolution.

・[View]

select whether to diplay thumbnail on the [Edit] window’ [story] tab in

[standard] or [High] quality.

Options

Configure other [story] file preference.

・[Auto Data Save When Changing Pages]

When electing [Previou page] or [Next page] from the [story] menu, data will

automatically be aved.

・[Auto Create New Page When Changing Pages]

When electing [Next page] from the [Page File] menu, if there i no [Next

page] a new one will be created.

・[Always Open in New Window When Opening With Double Click]

The page will be diplayed in a new window upon double clicking.

PageConfigure the diplay or key input preference from the [File] tab.

Display

Configure the preference for the [Preference] window [Page] tab.

・[View Quality]

select from [standard], [High] or [Maximum] for the Page diplay quality.

・[Show Transparent Areas In Checkered Pattern]

When thi option i elected, the tranparent area will be diplayed with

a checkered pattern for viibility convenience.・[Transparent Area Display Color]

Thi option allow the uer to diplay the tranparent area in a elected color.

・[Preview During Move and Transform]

Configure the diplay condition of the image which i temporarily hown when

doing the [Move and modify] or [Tone ditortion] from the [Edit] menu.

・[Transformation Guide Display Color]

Change the color of the guideline hown when you elect a [Move and

Tranform] operation from the [Edit] menu.

・[Transformation Guide Width]

Change the width of the guideline hown when you elect a [Move and

Tranform] operation from the [Edit] menu.

・[Change Vector Width After Transformation] (EX only)

Change the vector line width when carrying out [Move and modify].

・ [Link New Window With Opened Separate Window Display Range]

From the [Window] menu, link the diplay area of the multiple [Edit] window

[Page File] tab which are diplayed by the [New window] command.

・[Quick Mask Range Display Color] (EX only)

Configure the diplay color of the Quick Mak area.

:

Manga Studio

Preferences02

Configure preferences for Title, Page, Layer, Tool, Printing Scanning, Memory, etc.

The [Preference] window i diplayed by electing、[File] - [Preference]. The [Preference] window will be diplayed by electing、[File] - [Preference].

Key Input

Configure the amount of movement when uing the direction key on the

keyboard with the [Layer Move] tool.

・[Vertical Displacement]

Configure the amount of vertical movement when the up/down key are preed.

・[Horizontal Displacement]

Configure the amount of horizontal movement when the left/right key are preed.



Manga Studio

12

Page: Magnification Angle

Thi et the diplay magnification and diplay angle of the page.

Display Scale

Thi et the diplay cale of the page.

・Display Magnification List

select the diplay magnification from a lit of poible etting.

・Display Magnification Display Box

Manually enter the preferred magnification etting.

・[Add]

Add the manually inputted preferred etting to the cale diplay lit.

・[Change] Change the preference to one of the option from the diplay cale lit.

・[Delete]

Delete a diplay etting from the cale diplay lit.

・[Reset All]

Reet the cale diplay lit to it default etting.

Display Angle

Thi et the diplay angle of the page.

・[Step value]

set the rotational angle when clicking the [set rotation angle] button from the

[Page File] or [Panel] tab from the [Edit] window.

Print Size Display

Thi et the print ize of the page.

・[Print Size Viewing Scale]

From the [Preference] window, click the [Print size] button, or the [Print size]

command from the [Window] menu.

Page: Ruler

Configure preference for ruler.

Display

Configure preference for grid diplay.

・[Show Graduations On Straight Line Rulers]

Diplay a grid on [Horizontal Ruler].

・[Show Guide Lines When Snapping To Parallel Lines Or Speed Lines]

(EX only)

When napping to [Parallel or Radial Line rule], a guide line will be diplayed

which how in which direction to lay the line.

・[Move The Parallel Lines Ruler Display Position To Edge Of View](EX only)

Diplay [Parallel line ruler] on edge of [Edit] window [Page File] tab.

・[Sub Ruler Default Color]

Configure the default diplay color for the ub rule.

Key Input

Configure preference for keyboard control of the ruler.

・[Vertical Displacement]

Configure the amount of vertical ruler movement by keyboard input.

・[Horizontal Displacement]

Configure the amount of horizontal ruler movement by keyboard input.

・[Rotation Amount]

Configure the amount of ruler rotation by keyboard input.

・[Scale]

Configure the Zoom in/Zoom out cale by keyboard input.

The [Preference] window will be diplayed by electing、[File] - [Preference]. The [Preference] window will be diplayed by electing、[File] - [Preference].



UserGuide

13

C h a p t e r

1


t e d

Page: Panel Settings

Border Panel preference configuration.

Panel Settings

Configure preference for Panel.

・[Panel Preview Display Color]

set the diplay color for the [Panel Ruler].

・[Show Opacity]

Configure etting for opacity of the [Panel Ruler] diplay.

・[Panel Width]

Configure the [Panel Ruler] border width.

Side Interval

Configure preference for Panel ruler interval.

・[Horizontal Interval]

Configure preference for the [Horizontal Interval] value from the [Panel Ruler

Cutter Option] palette.

・[Vertical Interval]

Configure preference for the [Vertical Interval] from the [Panel Ruler Cutter

Option] palette.

Frame Area

Configure preference for Panel area.

・[Margin of Frame Area]

Configure the margin outide the panel border when creating the [Panel

Folder] from the [Panel Frame Ruler Layer].

LayerConfigure preference for [Layer] pallete.

Default Layer Properties

Configure preference for the default layer.

・[Layer Type]

select the default layer option. The preference of the elected layer will be

diplayed below.

・[Default Options] button

Modify the default option of the layer elected in [Layer Type].

・[Prioritize Color Model As Page/Story Standard Color Mode]

From the [Layer] menu, when creating a Rater layer Vector layer from the

[New Layer] (EX only),the page baic color repreentation will be the layer

[Repreentation color].

When turned off, the etting in the preference will be prioritized.

・[Show Properties Palette By Double Clicking Layer ]

When double clicking the Layer Icon, the [Property] palette will be diplayed.

・[Show New Layer Menu By Clicking Left Button]

When you left click the [Category] column on the[Layer] palette, the New Layer

Menu will be diplayed. When turned off, it will be diplayed by right click.

・[Switch Editing Subject Using New Tone/New Text Layer]

When a new [Tone Layer] or [Text Layer] is created, the new object will be a

new layer.

Thumbnail Size

select the ize of the thumbnail to be diplayed above the [Layer] palette.

The [Preference] window will be diplayed by electing、[File] - [Preference]. The [Preferences] window will be displayed by selecting、[File] - [Preferences].



Manga Studio

14

ToolConfigure preference for [Tool] pallete.

Arrange Tool Palette

Configure preference for [Tool] pallete layout.

・[Ver.4 Style]

Diplay the [Tool] palette in the Ver. 4. 0 layout. Change take effect after

application retart.

・[Classic Style]

Diplay the [Tool] pallette in the Ver. 3. 0 layout.

Tool OperationConfigure preference for [Tool] pallete operation.

・[Set Auto Scroll]

scroll the window to follow the movement of the curor when it move out of

the [Edit] window boundarie.

・[Show All by Double Clicking With The Hand Tool]

When double-clicking the [Edit] window with the [Palm] tool, the diplay cale

will automatically change to fit the window.

・[Allow Lines With Widths Less Than 1 Pixel]

When checked, you can draw ub-pixel line with the Draw tool.

When unchecked, line will be forced to be at leat one pixel.

・[Pen Weight]

Diplay the amount of inhibition when the tablet pen i being waved. When

the value i high, the line will be mooth, a the value get maller, the line will

be come more detailed.

The proceing time for the pen’ movement i et; the longer the line i, the

longer it will take to diplay.

Printing ScanningConfigure preference for Printing and scanning.

Print

Configure preference for Printing.

・[Wait for ~Before Printing Next Page]

set the tandby time per page when electing multiple page to print from the

[Edit] window [Page File] tab.

・[Use Memory Saver Mode For Monochrome Printing]

If a printer problem occur while thi option i elected, it may be remedied

with the memory aver mode.

・[Use Memory Saver Mode When Sending To Print Buffer] If a printer problem occur while thi option i elected, it may be remedied

with the memory aver mode.

・[Force Multi-part Print Compatibility]

some printer model may not handle multi-part printing correctly. Check the

box to fix thi problem.

Scan

Configure preference for canning.

・[Use Maximum of . . . Threads for Output]

set the number of thread (1-3) to ue for outputting image.

When outputting multiple page, your computer may run out of reourcedepending on it pecification and current environment. If o, the proce will

terminate. Lower the number of thread to 1 to fix the problem.

・[Close Dialog Box Each Time During Continuous Scan] (EX only)

Cloe the canner ide etting window when canning continuouly.

Do not normally ue [Ue Memory saver Mode When sending To Print Buffer] and

[Ue Memory saver Mode For Monochrome Printing].

Explanation




Manga Studio

16

Folder PathThi et the ave location of the Uer Data Folder.

Folder Path

Manage the aving, copying, etc of the Uer Data Folder.

The Uer Data Folder where the created data for pen etting, preference, etc of

Manga studio are aved.

・[User Data Folder Location]

select the location of the Uer Data Folder. setting will come into effect after

next tartup of Manga studio.

・[Copy Folder... ]

Copy the Uer Data Folder to a elected location to erve a a back up.

・[Browse Folder]

Change the location of the Uer Data Folder.

Optionsset the diplay for the Pallete or Color Profile, etc.

View

There are a number of diplay etting.

・[Display Color Palette Selection Items]

select the color of the [Layer] pallete item and [Hitory] pallete item.

・[Beginner’s Assistant Display Location]

Diplay the [Beginner' Aitant] on the [Left] or [Right]

・[Properties Palette Extension Method]

select whether the [Propertie] pallete expand from the [Left], [Right] or

[According To Tab].

・[Save Default View Settings For Each Page]

When checked, the diplay tate of the [Ruler Manipulator], [Ruler Handle],

[selection Launcher], etc. will be aved with each page. The diplay tate at thetime you aved the page will be retored when you open it. Thi i the ame a

prior behavior. When unchecked, the diplay tate of the [Ruler Manipulator],

[Ruler Handle], [selection Launcher], etc. will be the ame for all page. The

diplay tate at the time you aved the page will not be retored.

Units

Configure preference for the text unit.

・[Text Units]

From the [Text] tool, the unit ize of the input character [Q] (Q value)

and [pt] (Point) can be elected.

Icc ProfileConfigure preference for color profile data.

・[CMYK Profile]

Configure the CMYK profile.

・[RGB Profile]

Configure the RGB profile.

・[Rendering Intent]

Configure the Rendering Intent.


Do not place Manga studio and other application or ytem file folder in the [Uer

Folder Location].

If other data i placed in thi folder, Manga studio could fail to tart or function

correctly.

Notes IME Controls

Configure preference for IME control.・[Automatically Set IME to ON When Starting To Edit Text Layer]

Enable IME automatically when tarting to enter text in a [Text Layer].

Depending on your IME etting, you will be able to enter full-width text when

you begin text editing without preing the [Half-width/Full-width] key.



UserGuide

17

C h a p t e r

1


t e d

Export & Import

Copy the preference to allow haring and importing.

Export

By clicking on the [Export] button on any page of the [Preference] window detailed

preference can be exported. The [Preference] file type will have a.pff extenion.

Import

By clicking on the [Import] button on the [Preference] window, the uer can return

to prior etting by chooing a previouly aved [Preference] file (Extenion: pff).

When importing preference, all previou preference will be deleted. Before

importing etting, check all etting carefully.

NOTE



Manga Studio

18

:

Manga Studio

Shortcut preferences (For EX only)03

An introduction to shortcut modification and assignment method.

Shortcut preference basics

5

4

1

2

3

1 select either the [Menu], [Tool] or [Other] tab.

2 select the hortcut you want to change from [Category] or [Command].

3 Click the [New aignment] box and enter the key to be aigned to thehortcut from the keyboard.

4 When the entered key i diplayed in the [New aignment] column, click the

[Aign] button.

5 When you click the [OK] button, the hortcut will be aved.

You can modify or aign new hortcut.

select [shortcut setting] from the [File] menu.

1. Select Menu

[Shortcut Settings] window will be diplayed.

2. Change Preferences

・[Current Assignment] column

Diplay the current hortcut for the elected command.

・[New Assignment] column

The uer can enter the key for the new aignment.

・[Assignment] display

Diplay the name of the command aigned to the key entered in[New aignment].

How to read the [Shortcut preferences] window

・[Assign] button

Confirm the hortcut from the [New aignment] column.

・[Clear] button

Clear the hortcut from the [Current Aignment] and [New aignment]

column.

・[Reset All]

Reet all hortcut etting.



UserGuide

19

C h a p t e r

1


t e d

:

Manga Studio

Custom Tool Settings(For EX only)04

Here we will introduce how to save tools and menus to the [Custom Tool] palette.

Custom tool preference basicsThe [Cutom Tool] palette allow uer to freely ave tool and menu to make thing eaier.

select [Cutom Tool setting] from the [File] menu.

1. Select Menu

1 Click the [New setting...] button, and when the [Cutom Tool new preference]

window ha been diplayed, enter the name, and click the [OK] button.

2 select the [Menu] or [Tool] tab.

3 Nominate the [Menu] or [Tool] you want to ave from the [Category]

4 If you click the [Add] button from the [Menu/Tool] column, it will be added to

the [Cutom Tool Palette] column.

5 When you click the [OK] button, it will be aved to the [Cutom Tool] palette.

5

1

4

2

3

The [Cutom Tool setting] window will be diplayed.

2. Change preferences



第2

章

第1 章

第 3 章

第4 章

第 5 章

Files

Chapter 2

In this chapter we will introduce file and page operation.

Step: 01 File Operation 024

Step: 02 Page operation 035

Step: 03 Page 040

C h a p t e r

2

F i l e s

Step: 04 Import 042

Step: 05 Export 052

Step: 06 save 057

Step: 07 Print 064



User Guide

23

C h a p t e r

2

F i l e s

Regarding file compatibility

save Ver. 3. 0 file a Ver.

4. 0 file

Ver. 3.0 file can be opened in Ver. 4. 0. When

aved, they can be changed to Ver. 4. 0 file.

save a Ver. 4. 0 file a

a Ver. 3. 0 file

・ In Ver. 4.0, elect [save a] from the [File] menu,

and chooe the [save multiple], with the [save

in compatible type] option. By clicking the [OK]

button, the file will ave in Ver 3.0 file type.

Compatibility with previou verion of Manga studio:

Notes when converting from Ver 4. 0 to Ver 3. 0

・ Apart from the [Rater layer] and [Vector layer] [Color (32bit)] attribute, the [Revere

layer], [Layer folder], [Text folder] and [sketch layer] can be imported a i.

・[Rater layer] and [Vector layer] [Color (32bit)] will be lot.

・[Balloon layer]: Will be eparated into balloon image and text.

・[Panel Folder]: Converted to [Frame group layer]

・[Guide line ruler], [Concentric circle ruler], [symmetrical] will be lot.

・The [Making layer] on the page will be lot.

・When there are more than 2 making layer on a frame, all but the firt will be lot.



Manga Studio

24

Create New File

When creating a new file, you can elect from variou detailed etting.

Create new → Title (Custom Page)

select the Dimenion and create a [story] file.

1. Select the command

select [Create New story] → [story] through the [File] menu.

1

2

3

1 Configure Page size, etc.

2 set the number of page, etc.


3. Creation of the [Story] file is complete.

When the [story] file creation i complete, double-click the thumbnail of

the deired page. The [Edit] window [Page File] tab will open and ketchingcan begin.

2. Change settings

The [New story] window will be diplayed.

(Check that [Cutom Page] i diplayed)

Create new → Title (Page Templates)

[select from the Page Template] and create a [story] file.


select [Create New story] → [story] through the [File] menu.

2. Change settingsThe [New story] window will be diplayed.

1 select the [Page Template] tab.

2 selected the [Page Template] file by chooing a category and ub-category

from the left.

3 Double clicking the [Page Template] file will diplay the [Page template

etting] window. The configuration can now be checked.

6

25

1

3

For detail on each window item, refer to the『How to read the [New title/new

page] window [Cutom Page] tab 』( ⇒ P. 30)

Explanation



User Guide

25

C h a p t e r

2

F i l e s

3. Creation of the [Story] file is complete.

When the [story] file creation i complete, and double-click the thumbnail of

the deired page, and the [Edit] window [Page File] tab will open and ketching

can take place.

4 Click the [OK] button on the [Page Template] window.

5 set the number of page, etc.

6 Click the [OK] button on the [New story] window.

4

・ The [Page template etting] created in the [Uer] folder can have all but the

[Baic reolution] and [Page size] modified at a later date. The item with digital

key in the [Page template etting] aved in the [Default] folder cannot be

changed.・ For detail on each window item, refer to the『How to read the [New title/new


・ For detail of the [Page Template] icon refer to『How to read [Page Template]

tab icon』( ⇒ P. 31)

Explanation

How to read a Page

On a Manga studio page there i [Baic Frame] which hold the frame and the

[Finih Frame] or [Offet] which repreent the book cut poition.

AB

B A

C

D

D

C

A [Page size]The ize of the page a a whole.

B [Basic Frame]

The tandard frame for the panel layout.

C [Finish Frame]

The cut line when the page i printed into a book.

A picture can be printed to here.

D [Offset]

A tandby area in cae the [Finih Frame] line goe off coure when the book ibeing cut.



User Guide

27

C h a p t e r

2

F i l e s

4 Click the [OK] button on the [Page Template] window.

5 select the [Page structure].

6 Click the [OK] button on the [New Page] window.

3. [Page File] file creation is complete

When the [Page File] file creation i completed, open the [Page File] tab in the

[Edit] window and begin ketching.

4

・ The [Page template etting] created in the [Uer] folder can have all but the

[Baic reolution] and [Page size] modified at a later date but item with

digital key in the [Page template etting] aved in the [Default] folder cannot

be changed.・ For detail on each window item, refer to the 『How to read the [New title/

new page] window [Cutom Page] tab 』(⇒P. 30)

・ For detail of the [Page Template] icon refer to 『How to read [Page Template]

tab icon』(⇒P. 31)

Explanation



Manga Studio

28

How to read [Create new title/new page] window [Custom Page] tab

When you elect from [File] menu [New story] → [story] or [Page File], the [New

story] window will be diplayed.

In the [Cutom Page] tab, et the ize in detail and create a new [Page File] or [story].

・[Standard Resolution]

select from 72 ～ 1200dpi for the page reolution.

・[Basic Color Model]

select from [Monochrome] or [Color(32bit)].

・[Page size]

set the ize of the page.

[Width] and [Height] will be diplayed in pixel unit.

・[Units]

select unit of meaurement.

[select from mm], [cm], [in] (inche), [px] (Pixel) or [pt] (Point).

・[Width] (Page size)

set the page width between 3. 0 ～ 42. 0cm.

・[Height] (Page size)

set the page height between 3. 0 ～ 42. 0cm.

・[Page size] list

select the Page size from a regular ize.select from [B4], [B5], [B6], [A3], [A4], [A5], [A6], [Potcard],

[Cutom].

・[Inside Dimension]

set the ize of the inner frame (Baic Frame, Finih Frame, Offet) and diplay

guideline on the page.

・[Width] (Finish Frame)

set the printed ize width.

set thi larger than [Baic Frame] ize and le than [Page size].

・[Height] (Finish Frame)

set the printed ize height.set thi larger than [Baic Frame] ize and le than [Page size].

・[Finish Frame]

select the Finih Frame ize from a regular ize.

select from [B4], [B5], [B6], [A3], [A4], [A5], [A6], [Potcard].

・[Custom]

set larger than [Baic Frame] ize and le than [Page size].

・[Basic Frame] list

select the etting for the [Baic Frame].[set size] i et in the ize poition.

[set margin] can be et from up, down, left and right poition.

・[Width], [Height] (Basic Frame size setting)

set the [Baic Frame] width.

・[Width], [Height] (Basic Frame size setting)

set the [Baic Frame] height.

・[Offset X] (Basic Frame: Set size)

set the [Baic Frame] width poition.

・[Offset Y] (Basic Frame: Set size)

set the [Baic Frame] height poition.

・[Top edge] (Basic Frame: Set margin)

set the ditance of the top of the [Baic Frame] from the top edge of the paper.

・[Bottom edge] (Basic Frame: Set margin)

set the ditance of the bottom of the [Baic Frame] from the bottom edge of the

paper.

・[Outside] (Basic Frame: Set margin)

set the ditance of the right or left hand ide of the [Baic Frame] from the [stitching

Poition] direction.

・[Header] (Basic Frame: Set margin)

set the ditance of the right or left hand ide of the [Baic Frame] from the outer

[stitching Poition] direction.

・[Offset width]

set the offet width between 0. 0 ～ 10. 0cm.

The offet i a tandby area in cae the [Finih Frame] line goe off coure when the

book i being cut. Draw up to thi outer frame when you want to print to the edge of

the page.

・[Preview]

An image of the page et in thi dialog will be diplayed.

・[No. of pages] ([Story] only)

set the number of page in the title from 1 ～ 99.

In the lit you can elect from [1], [2], [4], [8], [12], [16], [24] or [32]

・[Stitch Position] ([Story] only)

select the book titch direction from [Right titch] or [Left titch].

・[Start page] ([Story] only)

select whether the firt page will tart from the [Right] page or the [Left] page.

・[Page Structure]

select whether you want a [simple page] or a [spread].

・[Story Info] button

The [story Info] window will be diplayed and [story Info], [Author Information], [Page

number], [Number setting] etc can be configured.



User Guide

29

C h a p t e r

2

F i l e s

How to read the [Story Info] dialog How to read the [Page TEmplates] tab icon

When you elect from [File] menu [Create New story] → [story] or [Page File], the

[New story] window will be diplayed.

Thee are the icon which are ued in the [Page Template].

・[Story Info]

Input the [Title], [Epiode], [subtitle] and elect from [Bottom Left] or [BottomRight] for the [Diplay Poition].

・[Author Information]

select from [Author name] and [Bottom Left] or [Bottom Right] for [Diplay

Poition].

・[Page Number]

select from [Bottom Left] or [Bottom Right] for the diplay poition of the page

number aigned to a [story] in Manga studio.

・[Number Settings]

Diplay and configure the actual page number (pagination) when the title

become a book.

・[Format]

Input pecial character in the pagination bordering both ide.

・[Start Number]

Input tarting number in the pagination.

・[Font]

select the font to be ued in pagination.

・[Font Size]

Input ize of pagination.

・[Display Position]

select the pagination diplay poition from [Inide], [Outide], [Center] or

[Hidden Number].

・[Apply Settings To All Pages]

Reflect et information and [Diplay Poition] to all page a per the elected rule.

select from: [Apply setting Content And Diplay Poition], [Apply Only setting

Content] and [Apply Only Diplay Poition].

Diplay the [story Info] window by electing from the [File] menu [Create New

story] → [story], and then electing the [story Info] button from the [New story]

window.

Configure the [story Info], [Author Information], [Page Number], [Number

setting] etc.

A B C D E F G H I J

A [Move up]

Move up one level of folder.

B [Move down]

Move down one level of folder.

C [Page settings]

A confirmation [Page template etting] window will be diplayed.



D [Create new page]A window will open for creating a new page where it will be poible to enter

each [Page template etting] item.



E [Create new folder]

Create a new folder in the current level.

F [Delete]

Delete the currently elected folder or [Page Template].

G [Icon]

Diplay the [Page Template] file or folder diplayed on the right with a large icon.

H [List]

Diplay the [Page Template] file or folder icon diplayed on the right with the

page name in a lit.

I [Details]Lit the [Page Template] file or folder icon and [Page name], [Page size], [Baic

reolution], [Finih size], [Baic Frame size] and [Offet width] diplayed on the

right in a lit.

J [Show Menu]Diplay the page etting menu.



Manga Studio

30

Saving a File

The file ave method are: [save], [save a], [save title with eparate name] and

[save all].

・When aving [story] file and [Page File] file, under the default etting they

will be aved a follow:

Vita: [start] button → [Document]

XP: [start] button → [My Document]

Explanation

Save (Story file)

Overwrite the [story] file over the ame file.You will be aked for the file name and ave location on the firt time only.

1. Select the Command

With the [story] file opened, elect [save] from the [File] menu.

3. Save Complete

The [story File] ha been aved.

2. Configure Settings

Uually, when the command i elected it will overwrite. However, during the

firt ave only, the [save] window will be diplayed.

2

1

1 Confirm [save Location].


Save title with different name (Title file)

save the previouly aved [story] a a eparate [story] with a different name.

3. Save Complete

The [story] file ha been aved with a different name.

2. Change Settings

The [save] window will be diplayed.

How to read the [Save] window ([Story] file)

・[Save as]

Enter the name of the ave file.

・[Save Copy]

save [story] file in the middle of editing a a copy with a different name.

When turned off, when the file being edited i aved a a different name it will

witch to that file.

・[Save as Compatible type]

A copy of the [story] file will be aved in Manga studio 3-compatible format.

Thi can be elected when [save copy] i on.


With the [story] file opened, elect [save title with different name] from the

[File] menu.

3

1

2


2 Configure the name of the ave file and the f ile type.




User Guide

31

C h a p t e r

2

F i l e s

Save with separate name (Page files)

save the [Page File] file from the previouly aved title a a eparate [Page File]

with a different name.

3. Save Complete

The [Page File] ha been aved with a eparate name.

2. Change settings

The [save] window will be diplayed.

Save (Page file)

Overwrite the [Page File] file over the ame file.

You will be aked for the file name and ave location on the firt time only.

2

1


With the [Page File] file opened, select [Save] from the [File] menu.

2. Configure settings

Uually, when the command i elected it will overwrite but for the firt time

only, the [save] window will be diplayed.

3. Save Complete

The [Page File] ha been aved.

1 Confirm [save Location]


3


With the [Page File] file opened, elect [save story A] from the [File] menu.

Confirm [save location].


2 Configure the name of the ave file and the file type.


1

2

How to read the [Save] window ([Page File] file)

・[Save As]

Enter the name of the ave file.

・[Save Copy]save [Page File] file in the middle of editing a a copy with a different name.

When turned off, when the file being edited i aved a a different name it will

witch to that file.

・[Save as compatible type]

A copy of the [Page] file will be aved in Manga studio 3-compatible format.

Thi can be elected when [save Copy] i on.



Manga Studio

32

Open FilesHere we dicu how to open aved [story] and [Page File] file.

Open

Open a aved [story] or [Page File] file.


select [Open] through the [File] menu.

1 select the [story] or [Page File] file.

2 Click the [Open] button.

1

2

3. Open file

File will be opened.

2. Select the File

The [Open file] window will be diplayed.

Save All

save all open [Page File] and [story] file.

For all file not aved to thi point a file name or ave location window will be

diplayed.

1. Select the Commandselect [save all] through the [File] menu.

Revert

Revert file content in the middle of editing to the lat aved condition.

Dicard the currently edited content.

select [Revert] from the [File] menu.

Open Most Recent Used File

Recently opened [Page File] or [story] file will be diplayed in a lit and theelected file can be opened and edited.

3. save completeThe [story] or [Page File] file ha been aved

Recently opened [Page File] or [story] file will be diplayed in a lit and the

elected file can be opened and edited.

select [Mot Recent Ued File] from the [File] menu.

2

1

1` Confirm [save Location].




User Guide

35

C h a p t e r

2

F i l e s

Select Paper and Insert

Inert a new [Page File] file with different page etting to the current page.

4. Insert Complete

A new page elected in the [Inert page] dialog will be inerted after the

elected [Page File] file.

2. Select Commandselect [select Page and Inert] from the [story] menu.

1. Select the Page

Select the page through the [Story] tab of the [Edit] window.

3. Select Page

select page from the [Inert Page] dialog.

1 select the paper.

2 set the number of page and inertion poition.


3

12

Copy Page

You can now copy page when page thumbnail are being diplayed in the [Edit]

window. You can copy them on the following creen:

・ [Edit] Window [Story] Tab

・ [Edit] Window [Page] Tab → [Page List]

・ From the [Story] menu, select [View] → [Page List] to show the

[Page List].

1

1 select the thumbnail of the page you want to copy.

2

2 From the [story] menu, elect [Copy Page].

3

3 The elected page will be copied.



Manga Studio

36

When repeatedly uing the ame command in the [story] menu, the command will

witch from diplay to non-diplay. Thi will apply when checked.

Explanation

It i poible to view page pread, or view ingle page eparately.


select [spread] through the [story] menu.

Open two page spread, open single

page (EX only)

1. Select Page

Through [story] tab of the [Edit] window elect the page to be combined with

the next page.

View Page Spreads.

Conecutive page file from the [story] file will be combined in a [spread].

3. Combination complete

The 2 [Page File] file will be combined and a two page pread will be et.

Make Single Page

From the [story] tab in the [Edit] window, elect the page et a a pread and from

the [story] menu, elect [Make ingle page] and the pread page will be eparated

into ingle page.

Adjust Print Guide

From the [Edit] window [Page File] tab with two page pread, the [Adjut Print

Guide] can be elected from the [Edit] menu to adjut the print guide.

Page display

You can witch the diplay in the [Page File] tab of the [Edit] window.

3. Switch Displays

[Page Lit] will be diplayed.

Page List

[Page Lit] will be diplayed or not diplayed.

1. Open the Page

Open the page through the [Page File] tab of the [Edit] window.


select [Diplay] →[Page Lit] through the [story] menu, and check.

Page Information


select [Diplay] →[Page Information] through the [story] menu, and check.

[Page Information] will be diplayed or not diplayed.

1. Open the Page


3. Switch Displays

[Page Information] will be diplayed.



Manga Studio

38

:

Manga Studio

Page03

You can change each setting of the page.

Change Title InformationYou can change the [story] file title information uch a [Author] [story name], etc.

Modify Binding Position/ Start PageChanging

You can change the [story] file' binding poition and opening page.

1. Open the [Story]

Open the [story] file through [story] tab of the [Edit] window.


select [Change story setting] from the [story] menu.

3. Change the InformationWhen the [story Info] dialog i diplayed, confirm title information etting and

click the [OK] button.

・Title information can alo be et with the [New story] dialog [story Info] button.

・ On the [Page File] file, there i no「story Info」o title information cannot be changed.

Application operation & explanation

1. Open the [Story]



select [Modify cloing poition and opening page] from the [story] menu.

3. Modify Closing Position and Opening Page

When the [Binding Poition/start Page setting] window i diplayed, change the

etting and click the [OK] button.4. Modifications are Complete

Title information modification are complete.



Manga Studio

40

:

Manga Studio

Import04

You can import a [Page File] file, picture file, Photoshop file or paper data.

Page FileImport [Page File] file and inert into [story] file.

[Page File] file import i complete.4. Import is Complete

1. Open the [Story]



select [Import] → [Page file] from the [File] menu.

3. Select the [Page File] file

The [Open File] window will be diplayed.

1 select the [Page File] file.


2

1



User Guide

41

C h a p t e r

2

F i l e s

Multi-layer filesMultiple layer of a [Page File] file can be imported.

1. Open the Page



select [Import] → [Multi-layer file] from the [File] menu.

Multi-layer file import i complete.

4. Import is complete

3. Select the folder where the layer file is saved

The [Browe For Folder] window will be diplayed.

1 select the folder where the layer file i aved. In the folder where the [Page

File] file i, it will be aved under the name [layer].


2

1

Layer FileImport one layer only to the [Page File] file.

1. Open the Page

Open the page through [Page File] tab of the [Edit] window.


select [Import] → [Layer file] from the [File] menu.

3. Select the folder where the layer file is saved

The [Browe For Folder] window will be diplayed.

1 select the [Layer] folder which i inide the folder containing the [Page File]

file from the [story] file and elect the deired layer file.


Layer file import i complete.

4. Import is complete



User Guide

43

C h a p t e r

2

F i l e s

1 When you click on the [Image adjut] tab in the [Propertie] window, the [Layer

setting] tab will be diplayed.

2 In the [Layer setting] tab, you can configure the baic layer etting.

2

1

Click the [OK] button of the [Propertie] window when etting are complete. The

layout of the imported image i complete.

6. Import is complete.

5. Adjust Image (Layer Settings)

1

1 When you click on the [Filter etting] tab from the [Propertie] window [Image

Adjut] tab, the [Filter setting] tab will be diplayed.

In the [Layer setting] tab inide the [Image Adjut] tab, the image can be adjuted.

When you elect [sketch layer] from [Type] in the [Layer setting] tab, it will change

to [sketch Layer].

For more about [sketch layer], refer to『sketch Layer』( ⇒ P. 150)

Explanation

EX only: Adjust image (Filter Settings)

With the [Image Adjut] tab, [Filter setting] ub tab, you can call up one filter and

adjut the image. Pleae ue a required.

Refer to "Chapter 9. Filter" ( ⇒ p. 255) for creating the election.



Manga Studio

44

A [Undo] and [Redo]

[Undo] and [Redo] can be performed on the action in [Adjut Poition].

B [Flip Vertical] and [Flip Horizontal]

The image can be flipped vertically or horizontally.

C [Show Guide Line] and [Hide]

The diplay and non-diplay of the guide line can be toggled.

Diplay it for the cae of adjuting through the drag operation with diplay of

handle in the image' periphery.

[Processing Types]

select the proceing type from [scale], [Rotate], [Free Tranform], [Ditort], and

[Perpective].

Dragging the handle in the image' periphery work in repone to the elected

proceing.

[Scale]

specifie the cale of the image in percentage of [Width] and [Height].

・[Relative Value]: Input the ratio of change (caling) from the current condition.

After confirmation, it revert to 100%.

・[Abolute Value]:

Input the ratio of change (caling) from the initial condition.When you change the image uing [Rotate], [Free tranform], [Ditort], etc, you

will loe the ability to et.

[Keep Aspect Ratio]

scale while keeping to the horizontal and vertical ratio of the image.

[Position]

The image poition i pecified in mm for [Left] and [Top].

[Angle]

specifie the image' rotation angle.

[Auto Adjust...]The [auto Adjut] panel will be diplayed and nominated item will be diplayed.

A BC

In the [Propertie] window [Adjut Poition] tab the poition, ize etc of the

image can be adjuted.

[Based On The Paper]

・[Position]

Adjut [Paper], [Print Guide Inner], [Print Guide Outer] and [Baic Frame].

・[Page File]

select the item which make up the baic poition for a two page pread. [Left

page] and [Right page].

・[Direction]

・ [Up] [Down]: Zoom in/out, adjuting poition up or down keeping in proportion

to the width of the image in the elected [Poition] ize.

・ [Left] [Right]: Zoom in/out, adjuting poition left or right keeping in proportion

to the height of the image in the elected [Poition] ize.

[Based On The Image]

・[Pixel Ratio To The Original Image]

set the pixel ratio to the original image by percentage.

[Align To Previously Loaded Position]

Adjut to previouly loaded poition and ize.

In the [Propertie] window [Adjut Poition] tab → [Auto Adjut] the poition, ize

etc of the image will be automatically adjuted.

How to read the [Properties] window [Move and Transform] tab How to read the [Properties] window [Auto Adjust] panel



User Guide

45

C h a p t e r

2

F i l e s

[Properties] window [Layer Settings] tab

When the [Propertie] window [Adjut Poition] tab → [Layer setting] tab i

elected image adjutment can be made.

[Layer Name]

Enter the name of the layer.

[Layer Type]

select the layer type a either [Rater layer] or [sketch layer] from the file to be

imported.

[Resolution]

select the reolution of the layer.

[Color Mode]select the expreion mode for the layer from [Black], [Black and white], [Grey]

and [Color].

[Output Attributes]

select from [sketch] or [Finihed].

[Bitmap Technique]

When the [Expreion Mode] i [Black] or [Black White], it will be bitmapped.

Here you will be aked to elect from [Threhold], [Peudo gradation] and

[Diffuion] for the bitmap method.

[Monerization Method]

When importing the [Expreion mode] in [Grey], a a layer etting you can electfrom [No tone reduction], [Threhold], [Peudo gradation] and [Diffuion].

[Threshold]

set the threhold value when bitmapping.

[Paste White As Transparent]

Change the white part of the image to t ranparent.

[View Page Image]

Diplay the page image to be imported a a preview.

[Filter Settings]

select filter item to be run from [Brightne/Contrat], [Tone Curve], [Tone

Reveral], [Poterization], [Brightne and Contrat (Automatic Correction)] and

[Level Correction]. Four filter can be performed imultaneouly.

[Settings]

In the etting item filter, detailed proceing etting can be configured.

[Properties] window [Filter settings] tab

When the [Propertie] window [Adjut Poition] tab → [Filter setting] tab i

elected image adjutment can be made uing filter.



Manga Studio

46

Photoshop file (EX only)Import a Photohop file with eparated layer into the [Page File] file.


select [Import] → [Photohop file] from the [File] menu.

1. Open the Page


3. Select the Photoshop file

The [Open] window will be diplayed.

1 select the Photohop file that you want to import.


1

2

Import will be complete and will be diplayed on the [Page File] a multiple [Layer].

5. Import is Complete

Configure etting with the [Import Photohop File] window.

4. Configure Photoshop file settings

1 By checking layer on or off in the layer lit, you can elect which layer to import.

2 Configure import etting for the elected layer.


1

3

2

[Import Photoshop File] window

[Layer List]

select the layer to be imported.

[Layer Merge And Import]

Import a Photohop file a a ingle image file.

[Jointly Use Layer Settings]

Rather than having individual etting for each layer, one etting can apply to

all layer.

[Paste White As Transparent]

Change the white part of the image to t ranparent and import. Item

applicable to all layer.

[Layer Settings]

For each individual original layer you can configure the etting.

・Layer Name

Enter the name of the layer.

・Layer Type

select the layer type of either [Rater layer] or [sketch layer] from the file to be

imported.

・Resolution

select the reolution of the layer.

・Color model

select the expreion mode for the layer from [Black], [Black and White], [Grey]

and [Color].

・Output Attribute

select from [sketch] or [Finih].

・Bitmap Technique

When the [Baic Color Model] i [Black] or [Black White], it will be bitmapped.

Here you will be aked to elect from [Threhold], [Peudo gradation] and

[Diffuion] for the bitmap method. .

・Monerization Method

When importing the [Expreion mode] in [Grey], a a layer etting you

can elect from [No Tone Reduction], [Threhold], [Peudo Gradation] and

[Diffuion] a the Monerization Method.

・Threshold Value

When electing [Threhold] for the [Bitmap Method] or [Monerization Method],

nominate the threhold value.



User Guide

47

C h a p t e r

2

F i l e s

TWAINUing an aftermarket canner, you can import an image a layer on a [Page File].

1. Connect the scanner.

Connect the aftermarket canner. For detail regarding the intallation of driverand connection method, pleae refer to the owner' manual that came with your

canner.

When you elect [Import] → [TWAIN] from the [File] menu, the canner driver will

be diplayed.

scanning method will differ according to the canner, pleae refer to the owner'

manual which came with your canner.

4. Scan

1 Configure reolution, etc.

2 Click the [Preview] button.

1

2

3 At the canner driver creen, adjut the can poition, etc and import. The

etting method will differ between canner.

4 Click the [Import] button.

Preview will be diplayed.

4

3

2. Select scanner driver.

1

3. Open the Page


2

When you elect [File] menu → [Import] → [select TWAIN Device], the [select

source] window will be diplayed.

1 select the canner driver.

2 Click the [select] button.



Manga Studio

48

Continuous Scan (EX only)Uing an aftermarket canner, you can import multiple page image into a [story]

a [Page File] layer.

1. Connect the Scanner

Connect the aftermarket canner. For detail regarding the intallation of driverand connection method, pleae refer to the owner' manual which came with

your canner.

2. Select scanner driver

Begin with the [story] file cloed.

When you elect [File] menu → [Import] → [select TWAIN Device], the [select

source] window will be diplayed.

1

2

1 select the canner driver.

2 Click the [select] button.

When you elect [File] → [Import] → [Continuou can], a [New story] window

will be diplayed.

4. Configure settings for continuous scan

3

21

3. Open the Title

Open the Title through [story] tab of the [Edit] window.

1 Configure Page size, etc.

2 set number of page.


When the imported image i diplayed on the [Page File] tab of the [story] file,

follow tep 4-6 from importing an [Image File]. For detail, refer to "Image File

( ⇒ P. 44).

Once the import etting have been confirmed, pre the [Enter] key.

5. Scanning is Complete

The canned image will be diplayed on the page and canning i complete.



User Guide

53

C h a p t e r

2

F i l e s

How To Read The [JPEG Settings] Window

・[Quality]

set the JPEG image compreion ratio (quality).

How to read the [Photoshop settings] Window

Configure the layer contruction.

・[Merge Layers Then Output]

Merge into 1 image with no hierarchy.

・[Keep Layer Structure For Output]

Output whilt maintaining each layer' tructure.

・[Output Layer Set (From Photoshop 6. 0 Or Later)]

Change layer folder to layer et and output.You can elect from [Only Allow 1 Layer] or [Up to 5 Layer (From Photohop Cs

onward)] for the converion condition.

・[Output Text As Text Layer]

Output text a a layer.

How To Read The [TIFF Settings] Window (EX only)

When [Color] i elected in [Color depth], it will witch to [Output In CMYK

format] etting.

・[Output In CMYK format]

Output In CMYK format.

[Icc Profile Settings]

select the Icc profile to be ued.

・[CMYK Profile]

select from [EuropeIsOCoatedFOGRA27. icc], [JapanColor2001Coated. icc],

[UssheetfedCoated. icc], etc a the CMYK Icc profile.

・[RGB Profile]

select from [AdobeRGB1998. icc], [AppleRGB. icc], [ColorMatchRGB. icc] and

[RGB Color space Profile. icm] a the RGB Icc profile.

・[Rendering Intent]

select from [Perceptual], [Keep relative color gamut], [Color aturation], [Keep

abolute color gamut] for the color converion method.

How to read the [PDF settings] Window (EX only)

・[Quality]

set PDF Quality.

How to read the [Color settings] Window

[Image Output Settings]

select from [Output in Layer Color], [Output in Cyan] or [Output in Black] for

each output color.



Manga Studio

54



Manga Studio

56

Save materials (EX only)

You can ave page, frame plit, layer, tone material, bubble material, character

material, pattern bruh material, etc to the [Material] window.

Refer to『Chapter 14 step: 01 Material 』( ⇒ P. 374) on how to ue material.

・ When the material i aved, in default etting it will be aved a below.

Vita: [start] button → [Document] → Manga studio Ver4 etting ￥Material

XP: [start] button → [My document] → Manga studio Ver4 etting ￥Material・ saved material can be dragged and dropped from the [Material] window to

the [story].

Explanation Application operation

Page

save the [Page File] file to the [Material] window.

1. Open the Page

Open the page through [Page File] tab or [story] tab of the [Edit] window.


select [save material] → [Page File] through the [File] menu.

3. Save is completeThe [Page File] file will be aved to the [Material] window [Material]→ [Uer] folder.

Frame split

save the frame plit etting to the [Material] window.

1. Open the Page

Open the page through [Page File] tab or [story] tab of the [Edit] window.

2. Select the commandselect [save material] → [Frame plit] through the [File] menu.

・When the material i aved, in default etting it will be aved a below.

Vita: [start] button → [Document] → Manga studio Ver4 etting ￥Material

XP: [start] button → [My document] → Manga studio Ver4 etting ￥Material・ saved material can be dragged and dropped from the [Material] window to

the [Page File].

Explanation Application operation

3. Save is complete

The [Page File] file will be aved to the [Material] window [Material]→ [Uer] folder.



User Guide

63

C h a p t e r

2

F i l e s

PrintingPrint.

1. Open the Page

Open the page through the [Edit] window [Page File] tab.

2. Select the Commandselect [Print] from the [File] menu.

3. Change preferences

The [Print] window will be diplayed.

1 select the printer.


1

2

4. It will print.

Printing i complete.

・[Paper]

select the [size] and printer [Paper source Method].

・[Print Orientation]

select from [Portrait] or [Landcape].

・[Margins (inches)]

set [Left], [Right], [Top], [Bottom] margin pace.

In the [Page setup] window the diplay will change depending on the environment.

How to read the [Page settings] window

Print Multiple Pages

Example

Here we will elect page 2-4 for printing.

1. Open the page list

select the range of page you want to print from the [Edit] window’ [story] tab.

Open the page lit from the [Edit] window’ [story] tab.

2. Select pages to print

There are two way elect the page you want:

・ Select with [Shift]-click

Hold down the [shift] key and click the firt and lat page in the range you want

to print. All the thumbnail in that range will how a red border.



User Guide

69

C h a p t e r

3

D r a wi n g

Operation Method (Vector Drawing)

Vector drawing i done on the [Vector Layer].

1. Open the Page

Open the page through the [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.

The [New Layer] window i diplayed.

[Vector Layer] i created in the [Layer] window.

1 select [Vector Layer] in [Type], and chooe etting.

Below are the tandard etting.

Type Vector Layer

Expreion Mode Black and White(2-bit)


2. Create the LayerClick the [Create New Layer] button in the [Layer] window.

Operation Method (Raster Drawing)

Rater drawing i done on the [Rater Layer].

1. Open the Page

Open the page through the [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.


1 select [Rater Layer] in [Type], and chooe etting. Below are the tandard etting.

Reolution 600. 0 dpi

Expreion Mode Black and White(2-bit)

Output Attribute Finih


[Rater Layer] i created in the [Layer] window.

2. Create the LayerDiplay the [Layer] window, and click the [Create New Layer] button.



Manga Studio

70

Drawing Color [Gray]The [Gray] drawing color ha a color depth of 8 bit, and i elected from

[Expreion Mode] of [Rater Layer].

Concept 1: Gray Image

By uing [Convert to Tone] of [subtractive Method] of the [Gray] drawing color, theimage can be drawn o that it ha varying denity on a ingle layer.

・If [Tone Layer] is used

If the normal [Tone Layer] i ued, it i neceary to create a [Tone Layer] for

each denity.

・If [Convert to Tone] of [Gray] drawing color is used

An image can be drawn with varying denity on a ingle [Rater Layer] by

changing the denity in the [Color] palette.



User Guide

73

C h a p t e r

3

D r a wi n g

Drawing Color [Color]There are 2 type of drawing color with different depth and creation method.

Concept

・[Single Color]

The drawing area of one layer i diplayed in a ingle color.

It ha a color depth of 8 bit and below, and i elected from [Alternative Color

to Black] of the [Propertie] window.

The color conit of [single Color] and [Full Color].

・[Full Color]

Multiple color can be applied to one layer.

It ha a color depth of 32 bit, and i elected from [Expreion Mode] when

creating the [Rater Layer].

Operation Method: Single Color

After pecifying [Alternative Color to Black] of the [Propertie] window, pecify the

color by electing [Color] radio button at [Diplay Color].

1. Open the Page

Open the page through [Page Number] tab of the [Edit] window.

2. Select the layer

Diplay the [Layer] window, and elect the target layer.

3. Do the Choose settings

Diplay the [Propertie] window, and elect the [Color] radio button from

[Diplay Color].

4. The color that is set in [Alternative color to black] in the [Properties]

window will be applied as the single color.

The elected alternative color i alo diplayed on the icon of the layer in the [Layer]

window.

The color of [Alternative Color to Black] of the [Propertie] window can be changed

by double-clicking.

Application Operation

The graycale diplay and color diplay can alo be witched by clicking the [show

Color] button on the top left of the [Layer] window.



Manga Studio

74

Operation Method: Full Color

Create [Rater Layer] with [Expreion Mode] a [Color (32-bit)], and operate with

the drawing tool.

1. Open the Page


2. Create the Layer

Diplay the [Layer] window, and click the [Create New Layer] button.


1 select [Color(32-bit)] a the [Expreion Mode].


A rater layer upported by [Color(32-bit)] i created.

4. Draw in color

Diplay the [Color] window, and elect the [Color] to be ued.

5. Draw in the image

When the drawing tool i ued on the page, it draw in full color.

3. Select the Tool

select the drawing tool from the [Tool] window.



User Guide

75

C h a p t e r

3

D r a wi n g

Operation Method: Edit Color

Edit the drawing color in the [Color setting] window.

1. Display the [Tools] window

Double-click the [Black] or [White] drawing color of the [Tool] window.

2. Display the [Color Settings] window

The [Color setting] window i diplayed.

1 select the color by clicking or by numerical input.

2 The elected color i diplayed in the [show selection Color] box.


3. Finish the color editing

The color of the [show selection Color] button i et a the drawing color.

1 2

3

Viewing of [Color Settings] Window

Double-clicking on [Black] or [White] drawing color of the [Color] window and

[Tool] window diplay the [Color setting] window.

A [Basic Settings] area

A 128-bit [Color sample] i lined up.

B [Color Settings] area (EX only)

Edit [Color setting].

C [Color Area]

select the color through clicking or by numerical input.

D [Color Slider]

select the color by clicking.

E [H]/[S]/[V]

set the color in [H]/[s]/[V].

F [R]/[G]/[B]

set the color in [R]/[G]/[B].

G [Show Selection Color] button

The currently elected color i diplayed.

Clicking ave the diplayed color to the color et.

H [Show Color Set] menu (EX only)

Diplay and elect the [Color set].

I [Get Color] (EX only)

Make the color elected in [Color set] the election color.

J [Save Color] (EX only)

save the current election color by overwriting to optional location of [Color set].

K [Add Color] (EX only)

Add the current election color to [Color set] a new.

L [Delete Color] (EX only)

Delete the color of the elected location in [Color set].

M [Edit Settings] button (EX only)

Addition or deletion from [Color set] can be made in the [Edit Color set] window.

N [Color Set] (EX only)

The [Color set] elected in the [show Color set] menu i diplayed.

・ The [set Color] dialog can only be diplayed when a layer of at leat[Color(32-bit)] i elected for [Expreion Mode] in the [Layer] window.

・ If election color i pecified from [Color set] of the [Color setting] area, click

the [Get Color] button after electing through clicking.

・[standard Color set] i a color et of the ame tructure a [Baic setting].

Explanation

1 1

1

A

B

C D

E F G

H

M

N

I J K L



Manga Studio

76

Tool Usage

When [show Lit] of [show Menu] of the [Pen Tool Option] window i elected,

the [Pen Tool Option] window lit i diplayed.

For the [Tool] window, right-clicking a tool icon further diplay a menu or icon.

[Tool] Palette

For ome of the tool icon, right clicking diplay more option.

For tool icon with ▼ hown at the bottom right of the icon, right-clicking or

holding down the click diplay a etting menu.When the tool icon menu i diplayed, it i poible to witch to another tool, and

when the tool etting menu i diplayed, the tool etting can be witched.

[Tools] Palette

Diplay of [Pen Tool Option] Palette/Tab

For [Pen Tool Option] window, clicking a tab or button further diplay a menu or icon.[[Pen Tool Options] Window

Manga Studio

Drawing03

The drawing tools include the [Pen], [Pencil], and [Magic Marker Marker] tools.

[stroke Preview] can be diplayed in both [show Tab] and [show Lit].

Explanation



User Guide

77

C h a p t e r

3

D r a wi n g

[Tool Settings Menu]

Clicking the [Tool setting Menu] button diplay the [Tool setting Menu].

[Tool setting Menu]

[Brush Control] Window

Clicking the [Bruh Control] button of the [Pen Tool Option] window to diplay the

bruh control option.

[Bruh Control] Dialog

[Change Brush Shape Menu]

When the [Change Bruh shape Menu] button i clicked, the [Change Bruh shape

Menu] i diplayed.

[Change Bruh shape Menu]

[Edit Polygon] Window

Clicking [Edit Polygon] button of the [Change Bruh shape Menu] diplay the

[Edit Polygon] window.

[Edit Polygon] Window

[Change Tool Option Settings] Window

When [Change Tool Option setting] of [show Menu] of the [Pen Tool Option]

window i elected, the [Change Tool Option setting] window i diplayed.

[Change Tool Option setting] Window



User Guide

79

C h a p t e r

3

D r a wi n g

O [Display Size Affects Correction]

The intenity of Correction change in repone to the magnification of page

L [Correction Based on Speed]

Adjut the Correction intenity baed on troke peed. The fater the movement,

the more intene it i.

M [Use size as the value on screen]

Regardle of the etting and ' diplay magnification, the drawing i done

with the curor ize in [size Preview].

N [Sharpen Angle]

Thi make the angle of the drawn line to become harp.

[Ue size a the Value on screen: Off] [Ue size a the Value on screen: On]

[Vector snap: Off] [Vector snap: On]

[sharpen Angle: Off] [sharpen Angle: On]

diplay.

P [Vector Snap] (EX only)

Thi aborb the line being drawn into line already drawn. It i valid for [Vector

Layer] only.

Q [Delete Overlapping Lines] (EX only)

R [Thickness]

Adjut the thickne of the pen-tip. When the [Bruh Control] button on the

left i clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.

S [Direction]

Adjut the direction of the pen-tip hape. When the [Bruh Control] button on

the left i clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.

T [Anti-Aliasing] (EX only)

For [Rater Layer] of 8 bit and above, an anti-aliaed line i drawn.

U [Shape Preview]

Diplay a preview of pen-tip hape etting. It i poible to adjut [Direction]

by dragging.

V [Change Brush Shape Menu]

The [Circle]/ [square]/[Polygon] menu and [Edit Polygon] button are diplayed,

and it i poible to elect or edit the pen-tip hape.



Manga Studio

82

Eraser ToolThe [Eraer] tool i eraing.

supported drawing layer

[Rater Layer]

[Vector Layer][Revere Layer]

[Tone Layer]

[selection Layer]

[Making Layer]

Non-upported drawing layer[Ruler Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer]

Operation Method

select the layer of the target image, and drag to erae.

1. Open the Page

Open the page on which to ue the eraer through [Page Number] tab of the

[Edit] window.

4. Erase

The image can be cleared by dragging on the page.

3. Select the Tool

select the [Eraer] tool from the [Tool] window.

In verion 4. 0, even when the eraer i applied to [Vector Layer] line, the inciion

i imilar to [Rater Layer].

When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Eraer Tool

Option] window i diplayed.

Viewing Tool Options

J

K

L

M

N

E

F

G

H

A B

C

D

I

[Inciion on Rater Layer] [Inciion on Vector Layer]

Concept

The line drawn on a rater layer and vector layer can be cleared.

2. Select the layer




Manga Studio

84

Magic Marker Marker ToolThe [Magic Marker Marker] tool i ued for drawing uniform line that are not

ubject to the effect of pen preure on line width and denity.

When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Magic Marker

Tool Option] window i diplayed.

Viewing of Tool Options

A [Drawing Tool Menu]

switche the drawing tool.

B [Tool Settings Menu]

switche the tool etting.

C [Show Menu]It i poible to witch between [show Tab] and [show Lit], and the etting

can be aved.

D [Stroke Preview]

Diplay the preview of troke hape etting.

E [Size]

Adjut the width of pen tip. When the [Bruh Control] button on the left i

clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.

F [Opacity]

Adjut the opacity of the line.

G [Sharpen Angle]

Thi harpen the angle of the drawn line.

H [Use size as the value on screen]


with the ize in [size Preview].

I [Correction]

Turn line Correction on/off, and adjut the intenity.

J [Size Preview]

Diplay the preview of the [size] etting. The ize can be adjuted even if the

preview i dragged.

K [Correction Based on Speed]

Adjut the Correction intenity baed on troke peed.

I

J

K

N

L

M

E

F

G H

A B

C

D

S

O

P

Q

R


[Rater Layer]

[Revere Layer][Tone Layer]

[selection Layer]

[Making Layer ]

[Vector Layer]


[Panel Ruler Layer]

3. Draw

Dragging on the page draw the Magic Marker-marker line.

Operation Method

Draw by dragging. Create a layer if neceary.

1. Open the Page


2. Select the Tool

select the [Magic Marker Marker] tool from the [Tool] window.



Manga Studio

86

Pencil ToolThe [Pencil] tool i mainly ued for naming and ketching.

The [Pencil] tool allow drawing of graycale denity baed on pencil preure. The

diplay method change according to [subtractive Method] of the layer in ue. For

detail, refer to "Drawing Color: Gray"( ⇒ p. 72).

Explanation

When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Pencil Tool Option]

window i diplayed.






C [Show Menu]

It i poible to witch between [show Tab] and [show Lit], and the etting

can be aved.

D [Stroke Preview]

Preview the troke-hape etting.

E [Size]



F [Opacity]

Adjut the opacity of the line. When the [Bruh Control] button on the left i


G [In]

Turn [In] on/off, and adjut the intenity.

H [Out]

Turn [Out] on/off, and adjut the intenity.

I [Correction]

Turn line Correction on/off, and adjut the intenity.

J [In/Out Based on Speed]

Adjut the [In]/[Out] intenity baed on troke peed.

K [Correction Based on Speed]

Adjut the Correction intenity baed on troke peed.

L [Size Preview]


preview i dragged.

Q

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

E

F

G

P

A B

C

D

R

S

O

Operation Method


2. Select the Tool

select the [Pencil] tool from the [Tool] window.

3. Draw

Dragging on the page draw the pencil line.

1. Open the Page



[Rater Layer]

[Revere Layer]

[Tone Layer][selection Layer]

[Making Layer]

Non-upported drawing layer

[Vector Layer]

[Ruler Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer]



Manga Studio

88

Calligraphy Pen (EX only)The [Bruh Pen] tool i ued for drawing cratchy line.


[Rater Layer]

[Revere Layer]


[Making Layer]


[Vector Layer]

[Ruler Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer]

Operation Method


3. Draw

Dragging on the page draw the bruh-pen line.

2. Select the Tool

select the [Bruh Pen] tool from the [Tool] window.

1. Open the Page


[Denity]: 1, [Ink Amount]: 200 drawn line



When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Bruh Pen Tool



I

H

J

K L

E

F

G

A B

C

D




switche the tool type.

C [Show Menu]


can be aved.

D [Stroke Preview]

Diplay a preview of troke hape etting.

E [Size]



F [Opacity]

Adjut the opacity of the line. When the [Bruh Control] button on the left i


G [Density]

The number of trand in the pen' hair tip can be adjuted.



Manga Studio

90

Pattern Brush ToolThe [Pattern Bruh] tool ue variou pattern to make a drawing, imilar to uing

a pen.


[Rater Layer]


[selection Layer]

[Making Layer]


[Vector Layer]

[Ruler Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer]

Operation Method


3. Draw

Dragging on the page draw a continuou pattern.

2. Select the Tool

select the [Pattern Bruh] tool from the [Tool] window.

Right-click the [Pattern Bruh] tool o the [Tool setting Menu] i diplayed, and

then elect the tool etting for pattern bruh.

1. Open the Page



When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Pattern Bruh






C [Show Menu]


can be aved.

D [Stroke Preview]

Diplay a preview of troke hape etting.

E [Size]

Adjut the width of pen t ip. When the [Bruh Control] button on the left i clicked,

advanced etting can be made through the window.

F [Opacity]

Adjut the opacity of the line. When the [Bruh Control] button on the left iclicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.

G [Hardness]

set the intenity of effect at pen' periphery. When the [Bruh Control] button

on the left i clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.

When thi etting i reduced, blurry line can be drawn.

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

E

F

G

P

A B

C

D

O



User Guide

91

C h a p t e r

3

D r a wi n g

For the method of aving pattern material, refer to "save Pattern a Bruh

Material" ( ⇒ p. 63) (EX only).


H [Interval]

specifie the interval for the drawing of pattern. The maller the value, the

cloer the pattern. When the [Bruh Control] button on the left i clicked,

advanced etting can be made through the window.

I [Size Preview]

Diplay a preview of the [size] etting. The ize can be adjuted even if the

preview i dragged.

J [Thickness]

Adjut the thickne of the pen-tip. When the [Bruh Control] button on the


K [Direction]

Adjut the direction of the pen-tip. When the [Bruh Control] button on the


L [Anti-Aliasing] (EX only)

For [Rater Layer] of 8 bit and above, thi draw an anti-aliaed line.

It i poible to adjut [Direction] by dragging.

M [Shape Preview]

Diplay the preview of pen-tip hape etting.

N [Change Brush Shape Menu]

The [Circle]/ [square]/[Polygon] menu and [Edit Polygon] button are diplayed,


O [Spray Area]

Adjut the range for praying the pattern. When the [Bruh Control] button on

the left i clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.

P [Density]

Adjut the denity of the pattern. When the [Bruh Control] button on the lefti clicked, advanced etting can be made through the window.

Changing of Pattern Brush

select [Change Tool Option setting] from [show Menu] of the [Pen Tool Option]

window.

・[style(Pattern Bruh): Pen]

A line appear a if drawn by pen.

・[style(Pattern Bruh): Airbruh]

Thi allow the uer to draw a if

with airbruh.

・[style(Pattern Bruh): stamp]

A continuou tamp pattern can be

drawn.

・[style(Pattern Bruh): Ribbon]

The pattern change and a natural

pattern can be drawn.



Manga Studio

92

Viewing of [Change Brush Shape Menu] Viewing of [Manage Pattern Materials] Window

A [Pattern Materials Collection] menu

select the category of pattern from the collection. If [Fixed Format] i elected,

it i poible to elect from [Circle]/[square]/[Polygon] in a imilar way to the

[Pen] tool.

B [Control Pattern Materials] button

The [Manage Pattern Material] window i diplayed.

C [Show Menu]

Diplay menu icon.

D [Repeat Type]

When an option other than [Fixed Format] i elected for the [Pattern Material

Collection] menu, the [Repeat Type] control i diplayed. The uer then elect

from the option lited below:

single Ue only the elected pattern.

Multiple(Repeat) Ue all diplayed pattern material repeatedly.

Multiple(Random) Ue all diplayed pattern material randomly.

・[Multibruh]

When [Multiple (Repeat)], or [Multiple (Repeat Randomly)] i elected, multiple

pattern can be drawn all at once.

A [Default User Materials Collection] menu

select the default pattern material collection. If the uer elect the aved

pattern material collection, it become poible to replace with other patternmaterial collection or material.

B [User Materials Collection] menu

select the category of pattern material aved by uer. It can be ued to delete

pattern and change name.

C [Show Menu]

Diplay the ave pattern menu.

D [Delete Pattern] button

Delete the elected pattern.

E [Add to User Materials Collection] buttonAdd the elected pattern to another material collection.

Pattern cannot be added to the default "Pattern Material Collection".

A DCB

E

E

CDCBCA

Explanation



User Guide

93

C h a p t e r

3

D r a wi n g

Eyedropper Tool (EX only)

A color can be matched/acquired from a preexiting image.

The color i acquired in [Drawing Color] of the [Tool] palette.

When the tone layer i clicked with the [Eyedropper] tool, the [Tone] can be

acquired a [Tone Color] in the [Tool] window. For [Tone Color], refer to "Acquire

Tone"( ⇒ p. 206).



[Rater Layer]

[Vector Layer]


[selection Layer]

[Making Layer]


[Panel Ruler Layer]

A [Browse Destination]

select the target layer.

・[Edit Layer]

Browe the layer that i targeted for editing in the [Layer] window.

・[Top Layer]

Browe the top layer among the layer in which the clicked poition i not

tranparent.

・[Image on Display]

Regardle of the layer, the color that i diplayed on creen i acquired a it i.

B [Average of periphery~mm]

Acquire the color of the average value of the pecified area.

C [Convert Color to Opacity and Acquire]

Acquire by converting the color to opacity.

D [Get Tone of Cl icked Position](EX only)

Acquire the tone of the clicked poition.


When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Eyedropper


A

B

C

D

1. Open the Page

Open the image page with the deired color through [Page Number] tab of the

[Edit] window.

Operation Method

select the layer of target image, and match the color by clicking.

4. Acquire Color

Click on the area where color i to be acquired from.

3. Select the Tool

select the [Eyedropper] tool from the [Tool] window.

2. Select the Layer




User Guide

95

C h a p t e r

3

D r a wi n g


When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Fill Tool






C [Show Menu]


can be aved.

D [Browse Several]Target multiple layer. select from [All Layer], [selected Layer], and [Layer in

Folder].

E [Sketch]

Thi function like the old [Ignore sketch] checkbox. When checked, rater

layer, [selection Layer] and [Gridline Ruler Layer] with the [sketch] attribute

will not be targeted for filling.

F [Text]

When checked, [Text Layer], [Word Balloon Layer] and [Text Folder] will not

be targeted for filling.

G [Paint to Vector Center Line] (EX only)

Fill until the vector' center line. It i valid for [Vector Layer] only.

H [Close Gap] (EX only)

Fill by cloing gap of the pecified pixel.

I

F

J

K

L

M

E

G

H

A

B C

D

[Fill Until Center Line: Before Execution] [Fill Until Center Line: After Execution]

I [Color Tolerance]

specifie the tolerance of the color in ame area.

J [Opacity]

Adjut the opacity of the filling.

K [Do Not Change Alpha] (32-bit only)

Fill without changing the opacity of the image.

L [Expand/Reduce Area]Fill by expanding or reducing the elected pixel.

M [Add Adjoining Pixels]

Fill by tracing adjacent pixel. If turned off, the ame color within the layer will

all be filled.

[Cloe Path: Before Execution]

[Cloe Path: Off/After Execution] [Cloe Path: On/After Execution]

[Add Adjoining Pixel: Off/After Execution] [Add Adjoining Pixel: On/After Execution]

N [Anti-Aliasing] (EX only)

Fill the border area of filling at a denity adjuted with the anti-aliaing of line.



Manga Studio

96

It i ued to fill a picture formed by multiple cloed area (area encloed by line)

in a ingle operation.

It i mot appropriate for coloring mall, hard-to-fill area uch a a 1-dot line or a

hair tip that make filling difficult.

4. Fill

The pecified range i filled.


[Rater Layer]

[Revere Layer]

[Tone Layer]

[selection Layer]

[Making Layer]


[Vector Layer]

[Ruler Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer]

Operation MethodFill by pecifying the Effect Range. Create a layer if neceary.

1. Open the Page


2. Select the Tool

select the [Fill Cloed Area] tool from the [Tool] window.

3. Specify range

select the Effect Range tool from the [CloeFill Tool Option] window, and

pecify the cloed area to be filled.

Fill Closed Area Tool (EX only)



User Guide

97

C h a p t e r

3

D r a wi n g

K [Text]When checked, [Text Layer], [Word Balloon Layer] and [Text Folder] will not

be targeted for filling

L [Paint to Vector Center Line] (EX only)

Fill until the vector' center line. It i valid for [Vector Layer] only.

M [Close Gap]

Fill by cloing gap of a pecified width.

N [Color Tolerance]

specifie the Allowable Error in Color when pecifying cloed area.

[Conform to Panel Borders]

When checked, only the area inide [Panel Folder] border will be elected for

filling. Thi option i only effective when a [Panel Folder] or a layer within a

[Panel Folder] i elected on the Layer palette.

O [Target Color]

set the pecified color to browing detination. The target color conit

of [Target all Color], [Draw in Tranparent Area only], [Draw in other thanTranparent Area], [Do not Change Alpha], [Draw in Black Area Only], [Draw in

Non-black Area], and [Draw in White/Tranparent Area Only].

P [Opacity]

Adjut the opacity of the filling.

Q [Expand/Reduce Area]

Expand or reduce the filling area by the pecified width.

A cloed area i an area encloed by line. The drawing color of the line can alo

have a mixture of black and white.

Explanation


When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [CloeFill Tool






C [Show Menu]It i poible to witch between [show Tab] and [show Lit], and the etting

can be aved.

D Effect Extension

The Effect Range can be elected from among [Pen ● ], [Pen ■ ], [Rectangle],

[Polyline], and [Lao].

E [Size]

Adjut pen width.

F [Reflect Pen Pressure on Size]

Thi make the preure of the pen on the tablet be reflected on the ize.

G [Use size as the value on screen]


with the ize in [size Preview].

H [Size Preview]

Diplay a preview of the [size] etting. The ize can be adjuted even if the

preview i dragged.

I [Browse Several]

Target the pecified layer. selection i made from [All Layer], [selected

Layer], and [Layer in Folder].

J [Sketch]Thi function like the old [Ignore sketch] checkbox. When checked, rater


will not be targeted for filling.

I

F

J

L

M

N

E

G

H

A BC

D

P

Q

O

K



Manga Studio

98

Line ToolDraw by dragging. Create a layer if neceary.

When drawing a line while holding down the [shift] key, the line i drawn at every

angle pecified in the [Pen Tool Option] window.



[Rater Layer]

[Revere Layer]

[Tone Layer]

[selection Layer][Making Layer ]

[Vector Layer]

[Ruler Layer]

Non-upported drawing layer [Panel Ruler Layer]

Curve ToolAfter determining the poition of both end by dragging, adjut the curve. Create

a layer if neceary.


[Rater Layer]

[Revere Layer]

[Tone Layer]

[selection Layer]

[Making Layer ]

[Vector Layer]

[Ruler Layer]

Non-upported drawing layer [Panel Ruler Layer]

Operation Method

Create a layer and draw.

2. Select the Tool

Right-click the [Line] tool from the [Tool] window, and elect the [Curve] tool.

1. Open the Page


Operation Method


1. Open the Page


2. Select the Tool

select the [Line] tool from the [Tool] window.

3. Draw

Dragging on the page draw a line. 3. Draw

On the page, drag from the tarting point to the end point.



User Guide

99

C h a p t e r

3

D r a wi n g

When dragged while holding down the [shift] key, a line i drawn every 45 degree.

.


Move the curor in the direction of deired curvature.

Clicking confirm it, and the curve i fixated and drawn.



Manga Studio

100

Polyline ToolMultiple line can be drawn through moue click. Draw by creating a layer if

neceary.

Operation Method

Create a layer and draw.

1. Open the Page


2. Select the Tool

Hold down the [Line] tool from the [Tool] window, and elect the [Polyline] tool.

3. Draw

Click the tarting point on the page.

When a econd point i clicked, a line i drawn in between.

Click on a third point.

A line i formed between it and the econd point.

Click on a fourth point. With each click, the clicked poition become a peak and

polyline i formed.

Double-clicking end the drawing, and that poition become the end point of the

polyline.

If the [Enter] key i preed during creation, the polyline i drawn to the poition

clicked upon immediately before.


[Rater Layer]

[Revere Layer]


[Making Layer]

[Vector Layer]

[Ruler Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer]

Non-upported drawing layer None



User Guide

101

C h a p t e r

3

D r a wi n g

・When drawing with the [shift] key held down, a line can be drawn at an angle

pecified in the [Pen Tool Option] window.

・Right-clicking or preing the [Ec] key while drawing cancel the angle

determined immediately before.


When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Polyline Tool


Viewing of Tool Options (Line/Curve/Polyline)





C [Show Menu]


can be aved.

D [Draw Figure]

Draw normally.

E [Create Ruler]

Create a ub ruler on the [sub Ruler Layer]. For [sub Ruler Layer], refer to

"Ruler Layer Type" ( ⇒ p. 109).

F [Draw Line Along Ruler]

Draw a line and create [sub Ruler] to [sub Ruler Layer] at the ame time.

G [Create Panel]

Create a panel folder in the figure. ([Polyline] tool only)

H [Sharpen Angle]

sharpen the line angle. ([Polyline] tool only)

I [Fill Inside Figure]

Fill the cloed area with the pecified color. ([Polyline] tool only)

J [Curve]

Turn the polyline into an incribed curve. ([Polyline] tool only)

K [Size]

Adjut the line width.

R

P

I

J

K

L

M

E F

N

Q

A B

C

D

U

V

O

G H

S

T

W

L [Opacity]


M [Stroke-in]

Turn [In] on/off, and adjut the intenity.

N [Stroke-out]

Turn [Out] on/off, and adjut the intenity.

O [Vector Snap] (EX only)

Thi make the application of each drawing tool to be aborbed by the already

drawn line. It i valid for [Vector Layer] only.

P [Size Preview]

Diplay the preview of the [size] etting. The etting can be adjuted even if

the preview i dragged.

Q [Thickness]

Adjut the thickne of the pen-tip.

R

[Direction]Adjut the direction of the pen-tip.

S [Fix Direction]

Fixe the direction of pen tip.

T [Anti-Aliasing]

For [Rater Layer] of 8 bit and above, draw an anti-aliaed line.

U [Shape Preview]

Diplay the preview of pen-tip etting. It i poible to adjut [Direction] by

dragging.

V

[Change Brush Shape Menu]The [Circle]/ [square]/[Polygon] menu and [Edit Polygon] button are diplayed,

and it i poible to elect or edit the pen-tip.

W [Fix Every]

Draw a line at each pecified angle.



Manga Studio

102

Rectangle, Ellipse, and Polygon ToolsIt i poible to draw rectangle, ellipe, and polygon.

Operation Method


1. Open the Page


2. Select the Tool

select the tool from the [Tool] window. Here, the [Rectangle] tool i elected.

For the [Ellipe] tool or [Polygon] tool, elect by right-clicking the [Rectangle] tool.


[Rater Layer]

[Revere Layer]

[Tone Layer]

[selection Layer][Making Layer]

[Vector Layer]

[Ruler Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer]

Non-upported drawing

layer

None



B [Tool Settings Menu]switche the tool type.

C [Show Menu]


can be aved.

D [Draw Figure]

Draw normally.

E [Create Ruler]

Create a ub ruler on the [sub Ruler Layer]. For [sub Ruler Layer], refer to

"Ruler Layer Type"( ⇒ p. 109).

F [Draw Line Along Ruler]

Draw the figure and create [sub Ruler] to [sub Ruler Layer] at the ame time.

G [Create Panel]

Create a panel folder in the figure.

H [Sharpen Angle]

Thi make harpen the angle of the figure.

I [Fill Inside Figure]

Fill inide the figure with color.

J [Size]

Adjut the line width.

When [Pen Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Polygon Tool


Viewing of Tool Options (Rectangle/Ellipse/Polygon)

Q

N

I

J

K

L

E F

M

P

A B

C

D

S

T

O

G H

R

U

V

W

Releaing the moue button complete the drawing.

3. Draw

Dragging on the page expand the figure diagonally.



User Guide

103

C h a p t e r

3

D r a wi n g

K [Opacity]


L [Sides] (Polygon tool only)

specifie the number of ide for the polygon.

M [Vector Snap] (EX only)

Thi make the application of each figure tool to be aborbed by the already

drawn line. It i valid for [Vector Layer] only.

N [Size Preview]


preview i dragged.

O [Thickness]

Adjut the thickne of the pen-tip.

P [Direction]

Adjut the direction of the pen-tip.

Q

[Fix Direction]Fixe the direction of pen tip.

R [Anti-Aliasing](EX only)

For [Rater Layer] of 8 bit and above, draw an anti-aliaed line.

S [Shape Preview]

Diplay a preview of pen-tip hape etting. It i poible to adjut [Direction]

by dragging.

T [Change Brush Shape Menu] button

The [Circle]/[square]/[Polygon] menu and [Edit Polygon] button are diplayed,


U [Start from Center]

start drawing the figure from the center.

V [Fix Aspect Ratio]

Fixe the apect ratio of the figure.

W [Rotate after confirming size]

Rotate after confirming the ize of the figure.

・When tarting to create by holding down the [Ctrl] key, the hape begin from

the center.

・When the [shift] key i preed while dragging, the apect ratio i fixed by the

value et in the [Pen Tool Option] window.

・If [Rotate After size i Decided] of the [Pen Tool Option] window i elected,

and [Rotate Every ～ °] i not elected, and the [shift] key i preed during the

rotation, the rotation i at the pecified angle.




Rulers

Chapter 4

This chapter will introduce ruler creation, perspective with rulers, frame layout and more.

Step:01 Ruler 108

Step:02 Bezier Curve Ruler (EX only) 117

Step:03 special Ruler (EX only) 123

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s

Step:04 symmetry Ruler (EX only) 130

Step:05 Panel Ruler 133

Step:06 Edit・Align Ruler 139



Manga Studio

108

Creation Method 1: Using the [Ruler Layer]

If uing the [Ruler Layer] to create a ruler, ue the method below.

1. Open the Page

Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.


2

1

1 select [Ruler Layer] from [Type].


3 select the created [Ruler Layer].

[Ruler Layer] i created on the [Layer] window.

3

[Sub Ruler Layer] + [Draw Lines Along the Ruler]

When you create a [sub Ruler], drawing line will be created at the ame time.

Thi only affect one Image Layer.

Pro

Creation of the ruler and drawing of line art can be done

imultaneouly. When you move or tranform the [sub Ruler],

the line art will be tranformed accordingly.

ConCannot be applied to multiple layer. Cannot delete jut one

part of the line art.

2. Create the Layer

Click the [New Ruler Layer] button in the [Ruler] category of the [Layer] window.



User Guide

109

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s

3. Create a Ruler

On the [Ruler Layer], drawing with the [straight Line], [Curved Line], [Polyline],

[Create Path], [Rectangle], [Ellipe] or [Polygon] drawing tool will create a ruler.

see [Drawing] (P. 67) for more detail about the Drawing Tool.

4. Enable Snap

1 select [snap] from the [View] menu. [snap] will be checked.

1

5. Select the Drawing Layer

select the Image Layer where you want to ue the ruler and draw.

3

6. Drawing with the Ruler

Bring drawing tool like [Pen]・[Pencil] or [Magic Marker Marker] cloe to the

ruler and they will be aborbed (napped) to the ruler.

2 select [set snap Point] → [Ruler] in the [View] menu. [Ruler] will be checked.

2



Manga Studio

110

Creation Method 2: Using the [Sub Ruler Layer]

If uing the [sub Ruler Layer] to create a ruler, ue the method below.

1. Open the Page



4

3

3 select [(Ruler)](sub Ruler Layer)] from [Type].


[sub Ruler Layer] i created on the [Layer] window.

1 select the Image Layer.

2 Click on the Create [New Image Layer] button in the [Image] category.

1

2

3. Create a Ruler

On the [sub Ruler Layer], drawing with the [straight Line], [Curved Line],

[Polyline], [Create Path], [Rectangle], [Ellipe] or [Polygon] tool create a ruler.

see [Drawing] (P. 67) for more detail about the Drawing Tool.

4. Enable Snap

1 select [snap] from the [View] menu. [snap] will be checked.

2 [set snap Point] → [Ruler] in the [View] menu. [Ruler] will be checked.

2

1

5. Select the Drawing Layer

select the Image Layer where you want the sub Ruler.

2. Create the Layer

Open the [Layer] window.

6. Drawing with the Ruler

Bring drawing tool like [Pen]・[Pencil] or [Magic Marker Marker] cloe to theruler and they will be aborbed (napped) to the ruler.



Manga Studio

112

Object Selector ToolWhen electing a ruler on the [Ruler Layer] to move and edit, 、ue the [Object

selector] tool.

How to Use

Drag or click to elect the ruler.

1. Open the Page

Open the page created by the ruler through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.

2. Select the Tool

select the [Ruler selection] tool from the [Tool] window.

3. Select the Ruler

With the [Ruler selection] tool, elect the ruler by dragging or clicking.

The elected ruler will become red.


When the [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Ruler selection


A [Set All Layers As Target]

select the ruler from all layer.

B [Select Entire Ruler]

selecting any part of the ruler will elect the whole ruler.

C [Add Vertex To Clicked Side]

A control point will be added where you click.

D [Match Other Vertices When Shifting Vectors]

Horizontally or vertically align other vertex point. Thi can only be ued on the

Panel Ruler Layer. see [step:05 Panel Ruler] (P. 133) for more detail about the

Panel Ruler.

E [Snap to Rulers]

Guide Line nap to the Meaurement scale when creating or moving them within

the nap interval. see [show Guide] (P. 364) for more detail about Guide Line.

E

A

B

C

D

・ Hitting the [Ctrl] key while uing a drawing tool like the [Pen] will temporarily

witch it to the [Ruler selection] tool.

・ While holding down the [shift] key, dragging or clicking will allow you to elect

multiple ruler and point on ruler.

Application



User Guide

113

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s

Ruler Operations

You can ue ruler with the keyboard or [Ruler Manipulator]. Move, rotate, enlarge,

and cale are available for diplayed ruler. When wanting to operate on a pecific

ruler, elect with the [Ruler selection] tool.

Using the KeyboardYou can operate the ruler with the keyboard.

1. Display the Ruler You Want To Use

Diplay the layer with the ruler you want edit.

2. Adjust the Center

Rotate and cale alway operate around the center. Move the center point

marked with a [+] with the [Ruler selection] tool or place the moue curor

where you want the center to be and pre the [Q] key.

3. Move, Rotate, ScaleBelow are the key combination for move, rotate and enlarge.

Moving the Ruler [ ← ][ → ][ ↑ ][ ↓ ]

Enlarging the Ruler [Z]

shrinking the ruler [X]

Rotating the Ruler Left [A]

Rotating the Ruler Right [s]

You can change the caling factor for each key pre by electing [Preference] →

[Page] → [Ruler] from the [File] menu. From [Key Control], you can et up [Vertical

Move]・[Horizontal Move]・[Rotate Volume]・[scale].

Application

Using the Ruler Manipulator

Ue the [Ruler Manipulator] to operate ruler.

1. Display the Ruler Manipulator

select [show Page Ruler Manipulator] from the [View] menu to diplay the

[Ruler Manipulator].

2. Adjust the Center

Rotate and cale alway operate around the center. Move the center point

marked with a [+] with the [Ruler selection] tool or place the moue curor

where you want the center to be and pre the [Q] key.

A

B A

B

DE

F

A

B

C

A

B

Movement Relativeto the screen

Click A to move the ruler on top ofthe image.

Movement Relativeto the Paper Click B

to move the ruler accordingto the direction of the paper.Rotating the diplay creenalo rotate thee arrow.

Free Move Drag B to freely move the ruler.

Rotate Clockwie Click C to rotate the ruler left aroundthe center point.

Ro t a t e C oun t e r -Clockwie

Click D to rotate the ruler right aroundthe center point.

Free Rotate Drag C or Dto freely rotate the ruler.

Enlarge Click E to enlarge the ruler aroundthe center point.

shrink Click F to hrink the ruler around thecenter point.

Free scale Drag E or F to freely cale the ruler.

3. Operating the Ruler Diplay the ruler you want to ue and ue the manipulator on it.



User Guide

115

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s

Manga Studio

Bezier Curve Ruler (EX only)02

You can create a ruler with a Bezier curve. After creating a ruler, you can freely transform it or operate on it again by clicking.

Concept

With the Bezier curve ruler, you can hape the curve by adjuting the angle and length

of control point. Thi allow you to make beautiful curve that would otherwie

be difficult freehand.

A Control Point

Point ticking out of the line that allow you to adjut the curvature.

B Anchor Point

start and end point on the curve.

Bezier Curve Ruler BasicsIntroducing the concept of the Bezier Curve Ruler.

[Uage Example: Pen in a you like along the path]

[Uage Example: Create a path]

A

B

B

A

About PointsRuler have control point and anchor point.



Manga Studio

116

Create Path Tool (EX only)The [Create Path] tool i ued to create a Bezier Curve Ruler.

supported layer

[Rater Layer]

[Vector Layer]

[Tone Layer][Revere Layer]

[Making Layer]

[selection Layer]

[Ruler Layer]

Non-upported [Panel Ruler Layer]

3

4

3 Click and define a control point near the tart point.

4 Click and define a control point near the end point. Upon doing o, a Bezier

curve will be created.

5. Create the Second Curved Line

1 Click and define the end point of the econd curve. Upon defining the end

point, a traight line will be created and you be able to define 1 control point.

2 Click and define a control point.

3 Double click and a Bezier curve ruler will be created.

1

2

3

・Hitting the [Enter] key will make the point you jut defined into the end point to

create a curve.

・Right clicking or hitting the [Ec] key will cancel the point you jut defined.

・For the econd curve, the firt control point i already et, o you only need to

define 1 more point.

Note・Usage

Creation Method 1: Create a Continued Curve

Create a curved line.

1. Open the [Edit] Window

Open the [Page] tab through the [Edit] window.

4. Create the First Curved Line

1

2

1 Click and define the tart point.

2 Click and define the end point. Upon defining the end point, a traight line will

be created with 2 control point.

3. Select the Tool

Right-click the [Line] tool from the [Tool] window, and elect the [Create Path] tool.

2. Select the Layer

Create [Ruler Layer] or [sub Ruler Layer] from the [Layer] window.



User Guide

117

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s

Creation Method 2: Create a Curve with a Corner

Create a curve with harp angle. A part with harp angle will be called a

[Corner].

1. Create the First Curved Line

1

2


2 While holding down the [Alt] key, click and define the end point. Upon defining the

end point, a traight line will be created and you be able to define 2 control point.

3

4

3 Click and define a control point near the tart point.

4 Click and define a control point near the end point. Upon doing o, a [Corner]

will be created.

2. Create the Second Curved Line

12

1 Click and define the end point. Upon doing o, the curve will be kinked and

you be able to define 2 control point.

2 Click and define control point near the tart and end point.

3

3 Upon doing o, Bezier curve ruler with harp angle will be created.

・ After defining the end point, clicking on a control point far away from the tart

point and then hitting the [Alt] key will alo make a [Corner].・ When you want to change the [Corner] tatu of anchor point, you can do o

with [Change Angle statu of selected Point] from the [Ruler] menu. For more

detail, refer to "Change Corner statu of selected Point" (P. 134).

Usage・Explanation



Manga Studio

118

Creation Method 3: Create a Closed Curve

Create a cloed curve.


2 Click and define the end point.

1. Tool Options Setup

Diplay the [Create Path Tool Option] window and check [Cloe Curve] in the

[Create Path] tool.

2. Create a closed curve.

3 Click and define the firt control point.

1

2

3

4 Click and define the econd control point. Adjut the hape and double click to

complete.

4



User Guide

119

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s

Adjust Method 1: Adjust by Control Point

You can change a curve by dragging a control point with the [Ruler selection] tool.

Thi will ymmetrically move the anchor point between the control point. Thi i

poible when the anchor point i not a corner.

Adjust Method 2: Adjust by Anchor Point

You can change a curve by dragging an anchor point with the [Ruler selection]

tool. Thi will move the control point on either ide of the anchor point.

For more detail about anchor point and control point, refer to "Edit・Align

Ruler" (P. 139).

Explanation



Manga Studio

120


When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Create Path Tool






C [Show Menu]

save etting more.

D [Create Ruler]

Create a ruler on the [sub Ruler Layer].

E [Draw Lines Along the Ruler]

Create a ruler on the [sub Ruler Layer] and draw accompanying line

imultaneouly.

F [Sharpen Corners]

sharpen corner of line.

G [Fill In Figure]

Fill in a cloed area with color.

H [Close Curve]

Connect the tart and end point and cloe the curve.

I [Size]

Adjut the thickne of the pen tip.

J [Stroke-in]

Adjut the intenity of the tart of a line by turning it On・Off.

K

[Stroke-out]Adjut the intenity of the end of a line by turning it On・Off.

[Drag to Set]

When checked, you can create a Bezier curve by dragging.

L [Size Preview]

Preview of [size] etting.

Can be adjuted even if the preview i dragged.

G H

I

J

K

D E F

L

CA B



Manga Studio

122

4. Enable Snap

select [snap] from the [View] menu. [snap] will be checked.

set [snap to] → [Perpective] in the [View Menu]. [Perpective] will be checked.

1. Select the Layer

select [Ruler Layer] or [sub Ruler Layer] from the [Layer] window.

How to Create

2. Create the Perspective Ruler

From the [Ruler] menu, elect [New Perpective Ruler (1 Point Perpective)],

[New Perpective Ruler (2 Point Perpective)] or [New Perpective Ruler (3 Point

Perpective)] from [New special Ruler]. For thi example, [New Perpective Ruler (3

Point Perpective)] i elected.

3. Ruler Selection Tool Adjust

You can adjut the perpective by dragging with the [Ruler selection] tool.

A Guide Line

Reference when drawing with ruler, extending from the vanihing point. It i

poible to rotate around the vanihing point by dragging.

B Center Point

Thi point i the center when moving the guide handle. It poition on the

guide line can be moved with the guide handle.

C Guide Handle

Point on both ide of the center point. It i poible to rotate around the

center point by dragging.

D Vanishing Point

Point of reference for perpective. It i poible to rotate around the center

point by dragging.

A

D

C

B

After creating a ruler on the [Ruler Layer], you can draw line along the ruler on

the image layer.

5. Drawing with the Perspective Ruler

When drawing on the image layer, the angle of the vanihing point and the

guide line allow the pen to be aborbed (napped) radially, o you can draw

with perpective.



User Guide

123

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s

Perspective Ruler Settings

When uing the [Perpective Ruler], thi etting allow you to chooe from 1 to 3

point perpective. Alo allow you to change etting, including helper line.

1. Perspective Ruler Settings

To diplay [Perpective Ruler] etting, right click on helper line or the vanihing

point with the [Ruler selection Tool].

・[set To Infinite]

Intead of making line go to a vanihing point, ue them a parallel line.

・[Diabling snap]

Diable nap.

・[Fix Poition Of Thi Vanihing Point]

Fix the poition of the elected vanihing point.

・[Fix Eye Level to Horizontal]

Thi function like the old [Fix Eye Level] option. Eye level will remain at the

horizontal even if you move vanihing point.

・[Fix Eye Level at Current Poition]

Eye level will remain at the current poition even if you move vanihing point.

・[One-point Perpective]

Enable 1 point perpective.

・[Two-point Perpective]


・[Three-point Perpective]


・[Perpective Ruler Detailed setting...]

Diplay the [Perpective setting] window and configure the helper line.

2. Perspective Settings

setting for guide line and helper line.

A [Hand]

Move the creen.

B [Click to Add Vanihing Point]

A vanihing point will be added where you click.

C [Click to Add Guide Line for Vanihing Point]

A guide line for a vanihing point will be added where you click.

D [Delete selected Point]

Delete the elected vanihing point.

・[show Auxiliary Line(V)]

Diplay helper line that extend toward the vanihing point.

・[Auxiliary Line Color]

set the color of the helper line.

・[Line Interval(D)]set the interval of the helper line.

・[Apply setting To All Vanihing Point]

Apply to all vanihing point, even thoe not currently in ue.

A B C D



User Guide

125

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s

Radial Curve Ruler (EX only)You can create curved peed line uch a focu line with thi ruler.

How to Create

From the [Ruler] menu, elect [New special Ruler] → [Create Curved speed Line

Ruler].

6. Drawing with the Curved Speed Lines Ruler

Drawing on the image layer, the pen will be aborbed (napped) radially,

allowing you to draw curved line from the center.

1. Select the Layer


2. Create the Curved Speed Lines Ruler

From the [Ruler] menu, elect [New special Ruler] → [Create Curved speed

Line Ruler].

A [Curved speed Line Ruler] will be created.

5. Enable Snapselect [snap] from the [View Menu]. [snap] will be checked.

set [snap to] → [Curved speed Line] in the [View] menu. [Curved speed

Line] will be checked.

3. Set Center

select the center of the [Curved speed Line Ruler] and drag to where deired

with the [Ruler selection] tool.

4. Adjust Control Points

By dragging the control point and turning the guide line, you can et the

curve of the [speed Line Ruler].



Manga Studio

126

Parallel Lines Ruler (EX only)You can create parallel line uch a peed line with thi ruler.

How to Create

From the [Ruler] menu, elect [New special Ruler] → [Create Parallel Line Ruler].

4. Enable Snap

select [snap] from the [View Menu]. [snap] will be checked.

set [snap to] → [Parallel Line] in the [View] menu. [Parallel Line] will be checked.

1. Select the Layer


2. Create the Parallel Lines Ruler

From the [Ruler] menu, elect [New special Ruler] → [Create Parallel Line Ruler].

A [Parallel Line Ruler] will be created.

3. Adjust Angle

Adjut the angle of the [Parallel Line Ruler] by electing with the [Ruler

selection] tool.

5. Drawing with the Parallel Lines Ruler

Drawing on the image layer, the pen will be aborbed (napped) o that it i

parallel to the guide line, allowing you to draw traight line.



User Guide

127

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s

Concentric Circle Ruler (EX only)You can create concentric circle with thi ruler.

How to Create

From the [Ruler] menu, elect [New special Ruler]→ [Create Concentric Circle Ruler].

4. Enable Snap

select [snap] from the [View] menu. [snap] will be checked.

set [snap to] → [Concentric Circle] in the [View] menu. [Concentric Circle]will be checked.

1. Select the Layer


2. Create the Concentric Circle Ruler

From the [Ruler] menu, elect [New special Ruler] → [Create Concentric Circle

Ruler].

A [Concentric Circle Ruler] will be created.

3. Adjust Shape

Adjut the poition, direction and hape of the [Concentric Circle Ruler] by

dragging with the [Ruler selection] tool.

5. Drawing with the Concentric Circle Ruler

Drawing on the image layer, the pen will be aborbed (napped) in concentric

circle, allowing you to draw circular line.



Manga Studio

128

Manga Studio

Symmetry Ruler (EX only)04

This ruler is used to draw symmetric shapes.

Types of Symmetric Rulers

The different type of symmetric Ruler are lited below.

Symmetry Ruler basics (EX only)

[Line Symmetry Ruler]

Centering on the ruler, allow you to ymmetrically draw thing imultaneouly.

[2-axis Symmetry Ruler]

Centering around 2 ruler, allow you to ymmetrically draw thing imultaneouly.

[2-point Symmetry Ruler]

Centering on the ruler, allow you to draw ymmetrically in 2 place at the

ame time.



ame time.


Centering on the ruler, allow you to draw ymmetrically in 4 point at the

ame time.



User Guide

129

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s



ame time.



ame time.



ame time.



ame time.



User Guide

131

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s

Manga Studio

Panel Ruler05

Efficiently create the panel layout for manga.

Panel Ruler BasicsThe [Panel Ruler] i ued to create panel.

Types of Panel Ruler Layers

Below are the 3 panel creation method.

[Raster + (Panel Ruler)]

Uing the [sub Panel Ruler Layer] aociated with the [Rater Layer], draw the

panel. Thi feature wa introduced in Ver. 3. 0 and up.

There i no need to raterize the [Panel Ruler Layer].

Even if you move the ruler, the panel will be moved and redrawn accordingly.

You can edit and move the panel of the [Panel Ruler] by electing it with the [Ruler

selection] tool jut like a ruler.

Explanation

The [Rater and Panel Frame Ruler] will automatically redraw the panel frame when

the panel frame ruler ha been edited.

Explanation

[Panel Ruler Layer]Create a panel by raterizing the [Panel Ruler] created by the [Panel Ruler

Layer]. Thi feature wa introduced in Ver. 2. 0 and up.

・Uing the [Panel Ruler Layer]

・Uing the [Rater and Panel Frame Ruler]

・Uing the [Panel Folder]



Manga Studio

132

[Panel Folder]

Ue the [Panel Folder] to create a panel.

switch from the newly created [Panel Ruler] to the [Panel Folder] in the [Panel

Ruler Layer]. Thi feature wa introduced in Ver. 4. 0 and up.

Making each panel unit into an individual layer allow you to draw in the

panel like a page.

There i no need to raterize the [Panel Ruler Layer]. Even if moved, the panel

for the [Rater Layer] will be moved and redrawn accordingly.

Creation Method 1: Using the [Panel Ruler Layer]How to create a Panel uing the [Panel Ruler Layer]

PLEAsE NOTE: The Panel Ruler i alo referred to a Frame Border Ruler in

part of the application.

・[Panel Folder] allow to you import image like photo (while till in page mode)

to create a photo comic.・You can ue panel layout with [Create Panel] or [Panel Folder]. see [Create Panel

Tool] (P. 168) for more detail.

Explanation

1. Create the Layer

Click the [New Ruler Layer] button in the [Ruler] category of the [Layer] window.


1 select [Panel Ruler Layer] for [Layer Type].


2

[Panel Ruler Layer] i created on the [Layer] window.

1



User Guide

133

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s

2. Edit Panel Ruler

Edit the Panel Ruler. Thi i where the [Panel Ruler Diviion] take place.

Confirm the [Panel Ruler Layer] election. In the cae of multiple [Panel Ruler]

diplay, ue the [Ruler selection] tool to drag and elect the deired ruler.

select [split Panel Ruler] from the [Ruler] menu.

The [split Panel Ruler] window will be diplayed.

1

2

1 specify the [Diviion]. The panel will be divided where the check boxe have

been checked and a preview of the reult will be diplayed.


The [Panel Ruler] will divided.

3. Rasterize the Panel Ruler

Confirm that the [Panel Ruler Layer] i elected in the [Layer] window.

select [Change Layer Type Type...] from the [Layer] menu.

The [Convert Panel Ruler] window will be diplayed.

1

2

1 select and et the [Draw Panel a 1 Layer] ection.


4. Complete the Panel

The image layer i created and the [Panel Ruler Layer] i complete.



Manga Studio

134

2. Edit Panel Ruler

Edit the Panel Ruler. Thi i where the [Panel Ruler Diviion] take place.

Confirm that the [sub Panel Ruler Layer] or the target [Rater Layer] i elected.

In the cae of multiple [Panel Ruler] being diplayed, ue the [Ruler selection] tool

to drag and elect the deired ruler.

select [Panel Ruler Diviion...] from the [Ruler] menu.

The [Panel Ruler Diviion] window will be diplayed.

1

2

1 specify the [Diviion]. The panel will be divided where the boxe have been

checked and a preview of the reult will be diplayed.



The panel will be divided and the creation proce i complete.

Creation Method 2:Using the [Raster + (Panel Ruler)]

How to create a Panel uing the [Rater Layer] + [sub Panel Ruler Layer].

1. Create the Layer

Click the [New Image Layer] button in the [Image] category of the [Layer] window.


1 select [Rater + (Panel Ruler)] for [Layer Type].


2

1

The [Rater Layer] attached to the [Panel Ruler Layer] will be created.



User Guide

135

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s

Creation Method 1: Using the [Panel Folder]

How to create a Panel uing the [Panel Folder].

1. Create the Layer

Follow intruction for "How to create a Panel uing the [Panel Ruler Layer]"

up to [Panel Ruler Diviion]. For more detail, refer to "Creation Method 1:

Uing the [Panel Ruler Layer]" (P. 134).

2. Convert the Layer Type

Confirm that [Panel Ruler Layer] i elected from the [Layer] window.

select [Change Layer Type Type...] from the [Layer] menu.

The [Convert Panel Ruler] window will be diplayed.

1

2

1 select and et the [Generate Panel Folder] ection.



Creating a panel with the [Panel Folder] i complete.

・ You can till move and edit with the [Ruler selection] tool after the converting to

[Panel Folder].

・ The Panel Ruler can alo be created by dragging to the Panel Material page of the

Material palette.

Explanation



Manga Studio

136

Panel Ruler Cutter ToolThe [Panel Ruler Cutter Tool] i ued to cut the [Panel Ruler] and [Panel Folder].

How to Use

Drag to cut the [Panel Ruler] or [Panel Folder].

1. Open the Page

Open the page with the [Panel Ruler] or [Panel Folder] you want to cut with the

[Page] tab of the [Edit] window.

2. Select the Layer

Diplay the [Panel Ruler] you want to target through the [Layer] window.

3. Select the Tool

select the [Panel Ruler Cutter Tool] from the [Tool] window.

When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Panel Ruler Cutter



・[Horizontal Interval]

set the horizontal interval between panel.

・[Vertical Interval]

set the vertical interval between panel.

・[Panel Width]

set the width of the panel.

・[Lock at 45 Degrees]

Lock the movement of the [Panel Ruler Cutter] tool at 45 degree.

If you want to draw a 1 Line Panel, et the value of [Horizontal Interval] or [VerticalInterval] to 0. 1mm.

Application

4. Cut the Panel Ruler

You can plit the Panel Ruler by uing the [Panel Ruler Cutter Tool] and

dragging acro the [Panel Ruler] or [Panel Folder].

Interval Between Panels

A

B

A Horizontal Interval

B Vertical Interval



User Guide

137

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s

Ruler EditingEdit a ruler with the [Ruler selection] tool. Ruler have the following 2 type of point.

A Control Point

Point ticking out of the curve that allow you to control the curvature.

B Anchor Point

Any point on the line.

A

B

Manga Studio

Edit・Align Rulers06

Change Rulers, Bezier Rulers, Special Rulers and Panel Rulers.

Cut Rulersselecting [Cut Ruler] from the [Ruler] menu will cut the elected (uing the

[Ruler selection] tool) ruler to the clipboard.

Ruler Bezier Ruler special Ruler Panel Ruler

○ ○ ○ ○

Copy Rulers

selecting [Copy Ruler] from the [Ruler] menu will copy the elected (uing the

[Ruler selection] tool) ruler to the clipboard.


○ ○ ○ ○

Paste Rulers

selecting [Pate Ruler] from the [Ruler] menu will pate ruler from the

clipboard.


○ ○ ○ ○



Manga Studio

138

Close Selected Ruler

With the ruler elected, right click and elect [Cloe selected Ruler] from the menu.

Thi will connect the end of the ruler.

Delete Selected Points

With anchor point elected, elect [Delete selected Point] from the [Ruler] menu.

The elected point or aociated line will be deleted.


○ ○ ○ ○


○ ○ ○ ○



User Guide

139

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s

Sharpen Selected Vertex Point

With a control point on the curve elected, right click and elect [sharpen selected

Vertex Point] from the menu. Thi will make a harp angle along the control point.

Combine Selected Vertex Points

With 2 end anchor point elected, right click and elect [Combine selected

Vertex Point] from the menu. Thi will connect the the anchor point with a line,

combining the ruler.


△ × × ×

△ Only when [Curve] i turned on in the [Tool Option] window of the [Curve]

tool・[Ellipe] tool or [Polyline] tool.


○ ○ ○ ○



Manga Studio

140

Change Angle Status of Selected Points (EX only)

With the anchor point of the curve created by the [Create Path] tool elected,

elect [Change Angle statu of selected Point] from the [Ruler] menu. The

continuity of the elected anchor point will be turned off and changed into a

[Corner].

Converely, [Corner] anchor point can have their [Corner] tatu turned off and

become a mooth curve.

A

B

C

The image above illutrate the difference B between [Corner statu] on/off

when C moving anchor point.

Normally, C moving anchor point will affect the other A point ymmetrically,

drawing a mooth curve. B But with the [Corner] tatu turned on, A point

become fixed and B you are able to make a corner.

A

B

C

[Corner statu: Off]

A

B

C

[Corner statu: On]

Separate Selected Vertex Points

With the control point or the ection between the merged anchor point elected,

right click and elect [separate selected Vertex Point]. Thi will eparate the

ruler. If the area between the 2 anchor point i elected, the ection between

them will be deleted.


○ ○ ○ ○ Ruler Bezier Ruler special Ruler Panel Ruler

○ ○ ○ ○



Manga Studio

142

Expand Panel Ruler (Page Bleed)

Expand the width of the [Panel Ruler] and the page bleed will be proceed.

5. Complete Expand Width

Width expanion for the [Panel Ruler] complete.

1. Open the Edit Window

Open the image of the targeted [Panel Ruler].

The [Expand Panel Ruler...] window will be diplayed.

2. Select the Layer

Diplay the [Image Layer] or [Panel Ruler Layer] attached to the deired [sub

Panel Ruler Layer] from the [Layer] window.

1 Configure setting.

2

Click the [OK] button.


From the [Ruler] menu, elect [Expand Panel Ruler].

3. Select the Panel

select the target [Panel Ruler] with the [Ruler selection] tool.

2

1 When the [Panel Ruler] i elected, the [show Page Ruler Handle] from the [View]

menu will diplay [Ruler Handle] which allow ruler expanion.

By clicking and dragging the arrow, the panel can be enlarged up to the bleed jut

like with the [Expand Panel Ruler].

Application


× × × ○



User Guide

143

C h a p t e r

4

R u l e r s

Merge Two Panel Rulers

You can merge 2 adjacent [Panel Ruler].

1. Open the Page

Open the page diplaying the Panel Ruler through the [Page] tab of the [Edit]

window.

5. Complete Merge

Merging of 2 [Panel Ruler] complete.

3. Select the Panel

select the deired panel with the [Ruler selection] tool.

2. Select the Layer

Diplay the [Image Layer] or [Panel Ruler Layer] attached to the deired [Panel

Ruler] from the [Layer] window.


From the [Ruler] menu, elect [Merge Two Panel Ruler].

Horizontalize

With the ruler elected, elect [Horizontalize] from the [Ruler] menu to align the

ruler horizontally.

Align RulersYou can align multiple ruler.

Verticalize

With the ruler elected, elect [Verticalize] from the [Ruler] menu to align the

ruler vertically.


× × × ○



Layers

Chapter 5

This chapter introduces the basic concept of layers, the different types, as well as the operation of the [Layers] window.

Step: 01 Layer 148

Step: 02 Layer Operation 155

Step: 03 Layer Diplay 164

C h a p t e

r 5

L a y e r s

Step: 04 Panel Folder 166



Manga Studio

146

Manga Studio

Layers01

This chapter introduces the basic concept of layers, the different types, as well as layer operation.

Layer Basics

We can think of "layer" a everal tranparencie laid on top of each other. When we look down through thee layer, we ee a ingle, complete image.

In the cae of a digital drawing, each tep of the proce create a new layer that can ubequently be edited. Combining thee layer produce the final image.

Layer are managed uing the [Layer] window. Thi let u change the layer ordering and tranparency a we deire.

The [Layer] window i acceed by electing [Layer] from the [Window] menu.

Concept

[Layer] window



User's Guide

147

C h a p t e r

5

L a y e r s

Layer Types

Different type of layer have different function, o we can create image efficiently.

[Image] Category

By uing the [Vanihing Point], [Focu Line], and [speed Line] filter, you can

add your own icon. To edit the [Focu Line Layer] or [speed Line Layer], double-

click the correponding icon.

For detail on the [Vanihing Point], [Focu Line], and [speed Line] filter, ee

"Chapter 9 Filter" on p. 255.

Explanation/Operation

[speed Line Layer]

icon

[Focu Line Layer]

icon

[Vanihing Point Layer]

icon

Furthermore, the [Rater Layer] ha a [Print Attribute]:

・[Finih] attribute

Upon printing or export, all of the output i converted. The [Finih] attribute i

et by electing the [Finih] attribute radio button at [New Layer] creation.

・[sketch] attribute

Upon printing or exporting, all of the output i converted. The [sketch] attribute

i et by electing the [sketch] attribute radio button at [New Layer] creation.

[Rater Layer]

(color 32-bit)

iconExample image

Example image

For an explanation of [New Layer], ee "New Layer" on p. 157.For an explanation of [Export], ee "Chapter 2 step: 05 Export" on p. 52.

For an explanation of [Print], ee "Chapter 2 step: 07 Print" on p. 64.

・[Raster Layer]

Ued to create name, ketche, and pen work in rater (bitmap format image layer).

The color depth can be et to black (1-bit), monochrome (2-bit), graycale

(8-bit), or color (32-bit).

[Rater Layer]

(black 1-bit)

iconExample image

[Rater Layer]

(graycale 8-bit)

iconExample image

[Rater Layer]

(monochrome 2-bit)

iconExample image

Although it i not poible to uehading with [Rater Layer] (black

1-bit), theoretically it only require

half the pace of [Rater Layer]

(monochrome 2-bit).



Manga Studio

148

・[Vector Layer] (EX only)

Ued to perform inking in vector format. Unlike the [Rater Layer], drawing

can be done without edge-baed reolution. A a reult, the format of the

line i changed after they are drawn.

The color depth can be et to monochrome (2-bit) or color (32-bit).

Example image

[Vector Layer](monochrome 2-bit)

icon

・[Sketch Layer]

Upon printing or exporting, the output i converted. The [sketch Layer] i et

upon being imported by the [Import] -> [Image File] or [Photohop File...]

function. The original ize i aved, uch that if the ize i ubequently

changed, the image quality doe not degrade.

[Vector Layer] (color

32-bit)

iconExample image

・[Sub Ruler Layer]

[Ruler Layer] i dependent on the image layer.

For an explanation of [sub Ruler Layer], ee "sub Ruler Layer" on p. 109.

Example image

[sub Ruler Layer] icon

・[Sub Panel Ruler Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer] i dependent on the image layer.

For an explanation of [sub Panel Ruler Layer], ee "Rater Layer + (Panel

Ruler)" on p. 133.

[sub Panel Ruler Layer] icon

Example image



Manga Studio

152

[Guide] Category

・[Guide Layer]

Ued to manage the guideline that are created when uing a ruler.

For an explanation of guideline, ee "Guide Diplay" on p. 364.

Example image

[Guide Layer]

icon

・[Grid Layer]

Ued to manage gridline on the paper. Only one layer can be created on each page.

For an explanation of grid line, ee "Grid Diplay" on p. 364.

Example image

[Grid Layer]

icon

・[Print guide/Basic frame layer]

Ued to manage the ' print guide and baic frame. Only one layer can be

created on each page.

For an explanation of print guide and baic frame, ee "Diplaying Print

Guide and Baic Frame" on p. 363.

Example image

[Paper] Category

[Print Guide and Baic Frame Layer]

icon



User's Guide

153

C h a p t e r

5

L a y e r s

Manga Studio

Using Layers02

Layers are manipulated using the [Layer Select] tool, [Layer Move] tool, and so on.

Layer Select toolThe [Layer select] tool i ued to elect multiple layer image from a page.

Using the tool

1. Display a layer

From the [Layer] window, diplay the layer that you want to elect on the page.

2. Select the tool

From the [Tool] window, elect the [Layer select] tool.

3. Select a layer from the image

On the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window, ue the [Layer select] tool to drag

the image. All of the layer diplayed within the area defined by dragging are

elected.

Viewing the Tool Options

select [Tool Option] from the [Window] menu. The [select Layer Tool Option]

window will appear.

・[Zoom display after selection]

Apart from the elected layer, the image ize i halved.

While the image i zoomed, you can ue the curor key to move up and down

among the elected layer and then draw on a layer.

If you pre the [Enter ] key or [Ec] key, the zoom diplay end and the

previou tool again become active.



Manga Studio

154

Layer Move ToolThe [Layer Move] tool i ued to move a pecified layer image only.

Using the tool

1. Select a layer

From the [Layer] window, elect the layer that you wih to move.

2. Select the tool

From the [Tool] window, elect the [Layer Move] tool.

3. Move the image

On the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window, ue the [Layer Move] tool to drag the

image. Only the elected layer image will move.

Viewing the tool options

select [Tool Option] from the [Window] menu. The [Move Layer Tool Option]

window will appear.

・[Auto-Select Click Position Layer]

The layer correponding to the clicked poition, a indicated by the drawing

line, i automatically elected.

・[Auto-Select Layer in Selection]

The layer within the drawing line, i automatically elected.

・[Tone Operation]

When you elect [Tone Layer], you can elect [Move Layer], [Move Tone], or

[Rotate Tone] a the operation mode.

For an explanation of tone, ee "Chapter 7 Tone" on p. 197.

・[Add to Actions](EX only)

You can elect either [Poition] or [Move Amount] a the method for adding to

the action function.

For an explanation of action, ee "Chapter 14 step: 03 Action" on p. 380.



User's Guide

155

C h a p t e r

5

L a y e r s

Creating New LayersThi chapter introduce the creation of a [Rater Layer] ued for drawing.

Using the tool

1. Display the window

Diplay the [Layer] window.

4. Complete layer creation

A new layer i added to the [Layer] window.


From the [Layer] menu, elect the [New Layer...] command.

3. Make the layer settings

A [New Layer] window will appear.

1 Make the following etting.

・Layer Type: Rater Layer

・Reolution: 600 dpi

・Color Model: Black And White (2 bit)

・Output Attribute: Finih

2 Click [OK].

Selecting LayersWe can elect layer from the [Layer] window.

Selecting Multiple LayersClick [Enable/Diable drawing] in the [Layer] window, and then place a check

mark in the [Enable/Diable Drawing] column. You can now elect multiple layer.

・ You can alo create a [New Layer] with the [Create New Layer] button on the[Layer] window.

・ When you click the Category column of the [Layer] window, the [New Layer]

menu i diplayed. select thi to create a new layer.

・ For an explanation of how to create a [Ruler Layer] and [sub Ruler Layer], ee

"Chapter 4 Ruler" on p. 107.

・ For an explanation of how to create a [Panel Folder], ee "step: 04 Panel

Folder" on p. 166.

・ For an explanation of how to create a [Making Layer], ee "Making Layer"

on p. 252.

・ You can elect multiple layer by holding down the [shift] key and then clicking

the layer to be elected.

・ If you mitakenly include an incorrect layer in your multiple election, click the

[Enable/Diable Drawing] column again uch that the check mark diappear.

Thi clear the election.

Application



Manga Studio

156

Layer DuplicationLayer can be duplicated.

1. Select a layer

From the [Layer] window, elect the layer that you want to duplicate.


From the [Layer] menu, elect [Duplicate Layer].

3. Completing the duplicationOn the [Layer] window, a layer entitled [Copy of...] i created.

Deleting a LayerLayer can be deleted.

1. Select a layer

From the [Layer] window, elect the layer you want to delete.


From the [Layer] menu, elect [Delete Layer].

3. Completing the deletion

The layer i deleted from the [Layer] window.

A layer can be deleted either by clicking the [Delete Layer] button on the [Layer]

window, or by dragging & dropping the layer on the button.

Application

Alo, by dragging & dropping a layer on the [Create a New Layer] button,

a [Duplicate Layer] i created.

Application



User's Guide

157

C h a p t e r

5

L a y e r s

Converting Layers to a FolderFrom the [Layer] window, create "Layer Folder", and then convert each type of

layer to a folder.

1. Select a layer

Click the [Enable/Diable drawing] column of the [Layer] window, and then electthe layer that you want to organize into one folder.

3. Make the folder settings

A [Group Layer Into Folder] window appear. Make the neceary etting and

then click [OK].

2. Select the commandFrom the [Layer] menu, elect [Group Layer Into Folder].

5. Close the folder

Clicking the triangle to the left of the folder cloe the folder.

4. Completing conversion to a folder

On the [Layer] window, a [Layer Folder] incorporating the elected layer i created.

・ A [Layer Folder] can alo be created by clicking the [Create New Layer Folder]

button on the [Layer] window. In thi cae, an empty folder i created, o

organize the layer into the folder by dragging & dropping.

・ To releae the layer from within a folder, elect the [Layer Folder] and then,

from the [Layer] menu, elect [Clear Folder Converion]. The folder i deleted.


Using the [Group Layer Into Folder] window.

・[Compress When Folder Is Closed]

When the folder i cloed, the content are compreed into a ingle image

preview. Thi can greatly improve your work flow.

The compreion i only applied to the preview, and doe not degrade the data.

・[Set to Panel Folder]

set [Panel Folder] a the folder type.

The area around the image i cropped and the image i then converted to a folder.

For an explanation of a [Panel Folder], ee "step: 04 Panel Folder" on p. 166.



Manga Studio

158

Layer Type Change

Method 1: Layer Type Change

1. Select a layer

From the [Layer] window, elect the layer you want to change.


From the [Layer] menu, elect the [Change Layer Type] command.


A [Change Layer Type] window will appear.

1 Uing [Layer Type], et the layer type.

2 Click [OK].

2

1

4. Completing the layer type change

The layer type change i now complete. The layer icon will change according to

the new type of the layer.

The layer type can be changed, by changing the rater ize.

Method 2: Convert raster vector (EX only)



Change a [Rater Layer] to a [Vector Layer].

3. Make the layer settingsA [Change Layer Type] window will appear.

1 For [Layer Type] elect [Vector Layer].

2 select [Vector setting...]

1. Select a layer

From the [Layer] window, elect [Rater Layer].

Important! A layer cannot be retored once it ha been raterized. When you et

[Preerve Original Layer] to ON in the [Change Layer Type] window, the original

layer will remain even after the layer type ha been changed.

Important!



Manga Studio

160

Method 3: Change SHD (EX only)

1. Select a layer

From the [Layer] window, elect a medium-reolution rater layer. Here, weelect a 150-dpi rater layer.

Uing the super High Denity (sHD) function, we can apply the mot appropriate

moothing proceing to enure the reproduction of the original image without

the appearance of jagged edge.

The [sHD] window appear.

5

6




A [Change Layer Type] window will appear.

1 Check that [Rater Layer] i et for [Layer Type].

2 For [Reolution] elect a reolution that i higher than that of the original layer.

Here, we elect 600 dpi.

3 Place a check mark in the [Ue sHD] check box.

4 Click the [sHD setting...] button.

5 For [Layer Type] elect [Threhold a Reference], [Diffuion], or [Dither].

The [Change Layer Type] window reappear.

7 Click [OK].

6 Click [OK].

4. Completing layer type change

The layer type change i now complete. The layer icon will change according to

the new type of the layer.

Uing the [sHD] filter, a low-reolution image can be enhanced to produce an

image with the equivalent of four time the reolution. If a ketch i canned at

a high reolution of around 600 dpi, then etting 600 dpi in the [sHD] window

will not produce any improvement in the image.




User's Guide

161

C h a p t e r

5

L a y e r s

Merging LayersMultiple layer can be merged into one.

・ Important! Once layer have been merged, original layer cannot be retored.・ A [Tone Layer] cannot be merged. When raterizing i performed a part of

a merge, note that Moire pattern may appear.

Important!

1. Select a layer

Click [Enable/Diable drawing] in the [Layer] window, and then elect the layer.


From the [Layer] menu, elect the [Merge Layer...] command.


A [Merge Layer] window will appear.

1 select a type for the combined layer.

2 Click [OK].

1

4. Completing layer merge

The layer merging i now complete.

Merging Layers

You can merge multiple layer.

Merging Down Layers

From the [Layer] menu, elect [Merging Down Layer]. Only the layer immediately

below i merged.



Manga Studio

162

Changing the Order of LayersOn the [Layer] Window, you can change the order of the layer by dragging &

dropping.

Before moving a layer

After moving a layer

Manga Studio

Displaying Layers03

Using the [Layer] Window, you can change the way in which a layer is displayed.

Show/Hide LayerBy clicking the [show/Hide Layer] column of the [Layer] Window, you can witch

between how/hide for the layer.

While an image i diplayed, an icon will appear in the column correponding to

that layer.

(Background foliage) layer: how

(Background foliage) layer: hide



User's Guide

163

C h a p t e r

5

L a y e r s

Layer order change, can only be applied to layer having the ame category,

uch a thoe of the [image] category.

Explanation

Displaying the Layer DivisionThe [Layer] window can diplay the layer diviion. When the [Layer] window i

diplaying two layer, moving the curor on the [Diviion Diplay Bar] drag the

uppermot layer down o that the other layer i diplayed.

4. Make the settings with the [Color Settings] dialog

Once the [Color setting] dialog i diplayed, elect a color and then click [OK].

5. The palette color is changed

The color of the [show/Hide Layer] and [Enable/Diable Drawing] column of the

[Layer] window i changed.

Changing the Layer Palette ColorYou can change the color of the [show/Hide Layer] and [Enable/Diable Drawing]

column of the [Layer] window.

1. Select a layer

From the [Layer] window, elect the layer you want to change.


From the [Layer] menu, elect [Layer Propertie...].

3. Change the palette color

Once the [Propertie] window i diplayed, double-click the [Palette Color] box.



Manga Studio

164

Manga Studio

Panel Folder04

This chapter introduces the basic concept of the panel folder, as well as its operation.

Panel Folder Basics

A "panel folder" i a pecial area (panel) on a page where a layer i made up of

everal layer.

Thi i ueful when you want to group layer together on a panel by panel bai.

When you double-click the [Panel Folder] icon in the [Layer] window, the [Panel]

window open, allowing you to edit the layer within the panel folder.

Concept

Page diplay: [Layer] window

Page diplay: [Page] tab of the [Edit] window

Panel diplay: [Layer] window of the [Panel Folder]

Panel diplay: [Panel Folder]

Within the panel folder, clicking the triangle in the [Layer] window caue the

layer within the panel to expand and, depending on the tatu of the [Page] tab in

the [Edit] window, you can then edit thoe layer.

Application

Thi chapter introduce the baic concept of the panel folder, a well a it operation.

A [Panel Folder] can be created in the following way.

Creation Methods

Uing the [Rectangle]・[Ellipe]・[Polygon]・[Polyline] tool ⇒ P. 167

Uing the [Panel Creation] tool ⇒ P. 168

Making change with the [Panel Ruler] ⇒ P. 137

Making a change from a election ⇒ P. 184

Making a change uing [Convert to Layer Folder] ⇒ P. 159

Uing [Panel] material ⇒ P. 134



User's Guide

165

C h a p t e r

5

L a y e r s

Creation: Figure tool [Panel Creation]

From the figure tool:

1. Open the page

Open the page uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.

2. Select the tool

From the [Tool] window, elect the [Rectangle] tool.

3. Create a [Panel Folder]

Draw a figure uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.

Diplay the [Rectangle Tool Option] window, and then click the [Create Panel]

button.

The Panel Folder i created.

・ When a [Panel Folder] i created uing the [Create Panel] tool, or changed from

[Panel Ruler], a ruler and [Making Layer] are created at the ame time.

・For an explanation of the [Making Layer], ee "Making Layer" on p. 252.

Explanation



Manga Studio

166

Panel Creation Tool

Ue the [Panel Creation] tool to create a panel folder.

Operation Method

Drag the [Panel Creation] tool over the page.

1. Open the Page


2. Select the Tool

Right-click the [Panel Ruler Cut] tool from the [Tool] window, and elect the

[Panel Creation] tool.

3. Create a Panel Folder

Drag the [Panel Creation] tool over the page to create [Panel Folder].

When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Panel Creation Tool



・[Specify Resolution and Color Model]

Enable the pecification of reolution and color model.

・[Resolution]

specify the reolution of the panel to be created.

・[Color Model]

specify the color model of the panel to be created.

When the [Diplay layer propertie] icon on the [Layer] window i clicked with a panel

folder elected, a pop-up menu i diplayed and the following operation can be

performed.

・[Convert a Panel Frame to a Layer]

Convert a panel frame to a layer. Thi change the layering

within a Panel Ruler Layer and enable the diplay of word

balloon and other effect on top of the panel frame.

・[show/Hide Panel Frame]show and hide the panel frame.

・[Raterize Panel Frame]

Dicard and raterize the ruler data.




User Guide

169

C h a p t e r

6

S e l e c t i o n

Color Mode

You can ue 1-bit or 8-bit color mode for a election.

1-bit Selection

Thi can be created with [selection Layer (1-bit)]. Thi create an outline with

harp edge.

8-bit Selection (EX only)

Thi can be created with [selection Layer (8-bit)]. Thi create an outline with

highlighted edge.

An 8-bit election can only be ued with 8-bit or 32-bit [Rater Layer] or 8-bit

[selection Layer]. Additionally an 8-bit election cannot be ued when pating a tone.

Explanation



Manga Studio

170

Rectangle Selection ToolUe the [Rectangle selection] tool to create rectangular election.


[Rater Layer]

[Vector Layer]

[Tone Layer]

[Revere Layer]

[Making Layer]

[selection Layer]

[Ruler Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer]


layer

None

Operation Method

1. Open the Page


Drag the [Rectangle selection] tool to make a election.

2.Select the Tool

select the [Rectangle selection] tool from the [Tool] window.

3. Create the Selection

Drag the tool over the image to create a election hown with a dotted line.

Ellipse Selection ToolUe the [Ellipe selection] tool to create elliptical election.

Operation Method

1. Open the Page


Drag the [Ellipe selection] tool to make a election.

2. Select the Tool

Right-click the [Rectangle selection] tool from the [Tool] window, and elect

the [Ellipe selection] tool.


Drag the tool over the image to create a election hown with a dotted line.


[Rater Layer]

[Vector Layer]

[Tone Layer]

[Revere Layer]

[Making Layer]

[selection Layer]

[Ruler Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer]


layer

None



User Guide

173

C h a p t e r

6

S e l e c t i o n

Magic Marker Wand ToolUe the [Magic Marker Wand] tool to create ame color area a the election.

Operation Method

Click the [Magic Marker Wand] tool over the image.

1. Open the Page


2.Select the Tool

select the [Magic Marker Wand] tool from the [Tool] window.


Click the image to create a election hown with a dotted line in the

continuou area of the ame color.


[Rater Layer]

[Vector Layer]

[Tone Layer]

[Revere Layer]

[Making Layer]

[selection Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer]


layer

[Ruler Layer]


When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Magic Marker

Wand Tool Option] window i diplayed.

A - H Same as the [Rectangle Selection] tool.

Refer to "Viewing of Tool Option (Rectangle selection/Ellipe

selection/Lao selection/Polyline selection)"( ⇒ P.174).

I [Browse Several]

Target everal layer. select from the following option.

All Layer All diplayed layer

selected Layer Layer elected with the layer window

Layer in Folder Layer in the elected folder

J [Sketch]

Thi function like the old [Ignore sketch] checkbox. When checked, rater


will not be targeted for election.

K [Text]When checked, [Text Layer], [Word Balloon Layer] and [Text Folder] will not

be targeted for election.

L [Paint to Vector Center Line] (EX only)

Fill to the vector center line. Thi i valid only for [Vector Layer].

M [Close Gap] (EX only)

Create a election by cloing a gap of a pecified number of pixel.

N [Color Tolerance]

Configure the allowable error in color when pecifying the election.

O [Expand/Reduce Area]

Expand or reduce the election by a pecified number of pixel.

P [Add Adjoining Pixels]

Create a election by following the ame color at the clicked poition.

Clearing thi check box elect all area with the ame color on the page.

A B

E F G

H

I

M

C

J

D

L

O

P

N

K



User Guide

175

C h a p t e r

6

S e l e c t i o n

Select from Current Selection

Ue [select from Current selection] on the [Tool Option] window to elect only the

area that i overlapping the currently elected portion.

[select from Current selection]

Uing the election tool while holding down the [shift]+[Alt] key alo enable

[select from Current selection].


select [Cloe Gap] on the [Tool Option] palette to cloe the gap of a pecified

number of pixel and create a election.

Thi can be ued when electing [shrink selection], [Inide selection], [shape

selection], or [Boundary selection] from the [Tool Option] window.

Close Gap (EX only)

[Cloe Gap: Before Execution]

[Cloe Gap: Off/After Execution]

[Cloe Gap: On/After Execution]



Manga Studio

178

The elected layer can be changed by electing the [Browe several] check box on

the [Tool Option] palette and changing the reference ource from the menu.

Browse Several (EX only)

[All Layer]

[Rectangle selection Tool Option] window

[Magic Marker Wand Tool Option] window

・[Selected Layers]

Target multiple layer elected with the [Layer]

palette and create a election.



Manga Studio

182

Blur the Border (EX only)

1. Open the Page

Open the page with the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.

Ue thi to blur the border inide the election.

The election i converted to 8-bit graycale automatically.


select [Blur Border] from the [selection] menu.

The [Blur Border] window i diplayed.

3. Blur Process Complete

The border of the election i blurred.

1 specify [Blur Range].


2

Convert Selection to Panel FolderCreate [Panel Folder] from a election.

select [Convert selection to Panel Folder] from the [selection] menu to execute the

command.

Refer to "Chapter 5. step:04 Panel Folder" ( ⇒ p.166) for detail on [Panel

Folder].

Transform Selection

The hape and content of the election can be tranformed.

select the [Move and Tranform] command from the [Edit] menu and execute the

command.

Refer to "Chapter 8. step:03 Move and Tranform"(⇒ p.237) for detail.

Select All

select the entire page.select [select All] from the [selection] menu to execute the command.

Clear Selection

Clear the election.

select [Clear selection] from the [selection] menu to execute the command.

Select Again (EX only)

select the election that wa cleared.

select [select Again] from the [selection] menu to execute the command.

Invert Selection

Invert the election.

select [Invert selection] from the [selection] menu to execute the command.

1

4. Fill the Selection (usage example)

The election with a blurred border i filled.



Manga Studio

184

3. Selection Filling Complete

The election i filled.

・[Drawing Color]

select the fill color. The [Drawing Color] button on the window vary depending

on the layer type.

1 bit select [Black], [Tranparent], or [(Current Drawing Color)].

2 bit select [Black], [White], [Tranparent], or [(Current Drawing Color)].

8 bitUe the graycale lider to elect the graycale value. You can alo

elect [(Current Drawing Color)].

32 bitYou can elect full color and the [Alpha] value. You can alo elect

[Tranparent] or [(Current Drawing Color)].

・[Draw Method]

You can now elect from [Preerve Black Area]・[Draw in Black Area]・[Draw

in White/Tranparent Area].

・[Color Specification] button

set the drawing color with the [Color setting] window. (Thi i valid only for

32-bit [Rater Layer] and [Vector Layer].)

・[Alpha Value]

set the opacity of the drawing color. (Thi i valid only for 32-bit [Rater Layer]

and [Vector Layer].)

・[Drawing Method] (EX only)

select [Fill All], [Protect Tranparent Area], or [Draw in Tranparent Area] for

the filling method.

・[Fill Enclosed Area] (EX only)

Fill only area encloed within the election.

・[Browse Several Layers] (EX only)

Target everal diplayed layer.

All Layer All diplayed layer

selected Layer Layer elected with the layer window

Layer in Folder Layer in the elected folder

・[Do not browse sketch] (EX only)

How to read the [Fill Selection] window

Fill the election in the drawing color currently elected with the [Tool] window.

select [Fill selection in Drawing Color] from the [Edit] menu to execute the

command.

Fill Selection in Drawing Color (EX only)

Remove the layer with the output attribute et to [sketch] from the target.

・[Paint to Vector Center Line] (EX only)

Fill to the vector center line. (Thi i valid only for [Vector Layer].)

・[Ignore Text]

When checked, [Text Layer], [Word Balloon Layer] and [Text Folder] will not

be targeted for filling.

・[Gap to Close] (EX only)

When uing, [Fill Encloed Area], cloe the gap between line with a pecified

width and fill that gap.

・[Conform to Panel Borders]

When checked, only the area inide [Panel Folder] border will be elected for

filling. Thi option i only effective when a [Panel Folder] or a layer within a

[Panel Folder] i elected on the Layer palette.

・[Expand] (EX only)

When uing [Fill Encloed Area], et the area to be expanded.

・[Allowable Error in Color] (EX only)When uing [Fill Encloed Area], et the allowable error in color.



Manga Studio

186

Create a election and change the color of line in the image to the color

elected with [Drawing Color] on the [Tool] window.

1. Open the Page


select the layer from the [Layer] window.select [White] from the drawing color on the [Tool] window.


select the [Change Line Color to Drawing Color] command from the [Edit] menu.

3. Change Complete

The color of the area that i not tranparent in the election i changed to a white

drawing color.

Change Line Color to the Drawing Color (EX only)

When a election i created, the [selection Launcher] i created and command can

be eaily elected.

A Clear selection Clear the election.

B Expand selection Expand the election. Refer to "Expand

selection"( ⇒ p.182) for detail.

C Reduce selection Reduce the election. Refer to "Reduce

selection"( ⇒ p.182) for detail.

D Clear Clear the content of the election. Refer

to "Clear"( ⇒ p.185) for detail.

E Clear Area Outide selection Clear the content of the area outide the

election. Refer to "Clear Area Outideselection"( ⇒ p.185) for detail.

F Cut and Pate Cut the content inide the election

and pate it into a new layer. Refer to

"Chapter 8. step: 01 Cut and Pate"( ⇒

p.228) for detail on [Cut] and [Pate].

G Copy and Pate Copie the content inide the election

and pate it into a new layer. Refer to

"Chapter 8. step: 01 Copy and Pate"

( ⇒ p.228) for detail on [Copy] and [Pate].

H Move and Tranform Move or tranform the content inide the

election. Refer to "Chapter 8. step: 03 Moveand Tranform"( ⇒ p.237) for detail.

I Fill selection in Drawing Color Fill the election in the drawing color.

Refer to "Fill selection"( ⇒ p.185) for

detail.

J Create New Tone Pate the tone into the content of the

election. Refer to "Operation Method 2:

When Uing the [selection Launcher]"( ⇒

p.201) for detail.

A B E F G H IC JD

Selection Launcher

select [selection Launcher] from the [Diplay] menu to change the [selection

Launcher] diplay.




Manga Studio

188

Selection Layer Operation

Here we will introduce how to ave and import a election uing [selection Layer].

Convert Selection to Layer

You can ave (convert to a layer) an image layer or other election to [selectionLayer]. Click the [Convert selection to Layer] button on the [Layer] window.

2.Selection Conversion Complete

The election i converted and [selection Layer] i created.

1. Create a Selection

Create a election through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.

1 select a layer created with [selection] from the [Layer] window.

2 Click the [Convert selection to Layer] button on the [Layer] window.

1

2



Manga Studio

190

Draw on the Selection Layer

You can freely draw on a new [selection Layer] and create a election with

a complicated hape.

Click the [Create New Layer] button on the [Layer] window to create a [selection Layer].

When [Black (1 bit)] i elected from the [New Layer] window, a 1-bit [selection

Layer] i created, and when [Gray (8 bit)] i elected, an 8-bit [selection Layer] i

created.

Explanation

2 set a follow.

Type selection Layer

Color Model ・Black (1 bit)

・Gray (8 bit) (EX only)

3 Click the [OK] button.1.

Open

the

Page


1 Click the [Create New Layer] button on the [Layer] window.


1

2. Create the Layer


3. Draw

[selection Layer] i created on the [Layer] window.

When a drawing tool on the [selection Layer] i ued, the drawn trace become

the aved election.

Convert the aved election to the election from the [selection Layer] a

neceary and ue.



User Guide

191

C h a p t e r

6

S e l e c t i o n

You can temporarily layer a election and ue the drawing tool to create, edit and

view a elected image. Thi i ueful for creating a election with a complicated hape.

Ue the [Ue Quick Mak/Cancel Quick Mak] button on the [Layer] window to

how or hide [Quick Mak] mode.

Quick Mask (EX only)


3. Cancel [Quick Mask] mode.

1 Click [Cancel Quick Mak] on the [Layer] window.

[Quick Mak] i deleted and [selection] i created where Quick Mak wa applied.

1

Ue the drawing tool to draw a election on Quick Mak. If a election ha

already been created, it i drawn a [Quick Mak].

1 Click the [Ue Quick Mak] button on the [Layer] window.


2. Use [Quick Mask] mode.

1

The mode witche to [Quick Mak] mode.


1. Open the Page



Tone

Chapter 7

This chapter introduces tone application. The digital tones handled by Manga Studio are "Manga Studio Format Tones" and

"Computones Format Tones."

Step: 01 Manga studio Format Tone 198

Step: 02 Computone Format Tone (EX only) 220

C h a p t e r

7

T o n e



User Guide

201

C h a p t e r

7

T o n e


When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Gradation Tool


A [Drawing Tools Menu]

The drawing tool can be witched.



C [Show Menu]

It i poible to witch between [show Tab] and [show Lit], and the ettingcan be aved.

D [Line Creation Mode]

A traight line gradation i drawn according to the ditance dragged.

E [Circle Creation Mode]

The gradation i drawn according the hape of the ellipe created by dragging.

F [Creation in Circle Mode]

The gradation i drawn in the ellipe created by dragging.

G [Draw On Selected Layer]

Draw gradation in the elected image layer.When off, a new [Tone Layer] i created.

H [Darkness Graph]

Adjut the denity balance of the generated gradation from tart to end point.

Increae the number of point by clicking in the graph, and adjut them by

dragging. It i poible to delete point by dragging them outide the graph.

I [Repeat Type]

switche the repeat type for gradation.

A B

E F

G

H

D

C

I

J

K

[Repetition] Repeat in the ame direction.

[Loop] Repeat in the by changing direction alternately.

[None]The gradation i only the ditance dragged, and the outide

of both end i filled with each color.

J

[Lines]specifie the number of line when creating a gradation.

K [Angle]

specifie the tone angle when creating a gradation.



Manga Studio

202

Tone Editing

Erasing Tones

You can erae tone uing [Drawing Color: Tranparent].

1. Open the Page


select [Tone Layer] from the [Layer] window.

2. Select a Tool

select the [Pen] or other drawing tool from the [Tool] window.

select [Drawing Color: Tranparent] from the [Tool] window.

3. Erase tones

Drag the drawing tool over the [Tone Layer] to erae the tone.

・[Pattern Bruh] ha content to erae a portion of the tone.

・Tone can alo be eraed with the [Eraer] tool.

Application



Manga Studio

204

Acquire Tone (EX only)

Ue the [Eyedropper] tool from the [Tool] palette to get the tone in the Drawing Color..

1. Open the Page

Open the page where the tone i applied with the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.

2. Select the Eyedropper Tool

select the [Eyedropper] tool from the [Tool] window.

Open the [Eyedropper Tool Option] window.

1 select [Top Layer] from [Browe Detination].

2 Check the [Convert Color To Opacity And Acquire] box.

1

2

3. Get the Tone

Click on the tone to obtain with the [Eyedropper] tool.

The tone i obtained to the [Tool] window [Tone Color].

When drawing with [Tone Color], a new [Tone Layer] i created.

The obtained [Tone Color] can even be ued a a drawing color for page or title

that do not have the original [Tone Layer].



User Guide

207

C h a p t e r

7

T o n e

Moving and Transforming the Tone Area

With the tone pattern remaining fixed, the pated hape (area) can be moved or

changed by itelf.

1. Open the Page

Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window. select [Tone Layer]

from the [Layer] window.


select [Move and Tranform] from the [Edit] menu, and then elect the

command to be applied from the diplayed menu.

Red guideline are diplayed around the tone, and the [Move and Tranform] tab

of the [Propertie] window i diplayed.

1 When the guideline or quare handle i dragged, tone area tranformation uch

a caling and rotation can be performed.

Refer to "Type of Moving and Tranformation" ( ⇒ p. 239) for the detail on

operation method.

2 When the inner ide of the guideline i dragged, the tone can be moved.

3 Tranformation can be done by inputting numerical value into the [Propertie]

window.

4 Double-click on top of the page, or click the [OK] button of the [Propertie]

window.

3. Tone Area Move and Transform Completes

The Tone Area [Move and Tranform] i complete.

2

1

3

4



Manga Studio

208

Distort Tone Pattern (EX only)

With the tone region remaining fixed, the pattern can be moved or tranformed by itelf.

1. Open the Page


select [Tone Layer] from the [Layer] window.


select [Tone Ditort] from the [Edit] menu, and then elect the command to beapplied from the diplayed menu.

Red guideline are diplayed around the tone, and the [Move and Tranform] tab

of the [Propertie] window i diplayed.

3. Distortion Transformation Complete

The movement and tranformation of the tone pattern i completed.

1 When the guideline or quare handle i dragged, tone pattern tranform o that

caling and rotation can be performed in repone to the elected command.

Refer to "Type of Moving and Tranformation"( ⇒ p. 239) for detail on

operation method.

2 When the inner ide of the guideline i dragged, the tone pattern can be moved.

3 Tranformation can be done by inputting numerical value into the [Propertie] window.

4 Double-click on top of the page, or click the [OK] button of the [Propertie] window.

3

4

1

2



User Guide

213

C h a p t e r

7

T o n e

Imported image and original pattern can be ued a pattern tone.

[Pattern] Tone

1. Open the Page

Open the page with the deired image uing the [Page] tab of the [Edit]

window. When pecifying an image region, a election i created.

2. Save New Tone

select [save Pattern To Tone Material...] from the [Edit] menu.

The [save Pattern in Tone Material] window i diplayed.

1 select a folder from the [Uer] folder.

If there i no folder, click on the [New Folder...] button in the lower left, create

a tone folder, and then elect it.


A [Pattern] tone i created in the [Material] window. The created tone can be

ued in the ame way a a normal tone.

saving without creating a election i the ame a hrink electing an image.

Notes



User Guide

215

C h a p t e r

7

T o n e

The following item can be elected when [Gradation] i elected a the [Tone Mode].

Gradation

The following item can be elected when [Background] i elected a the [Tone

[Background] Tone

A [Source Image Preview]

The ource image elected for the [Background] tone i diplayed.

B [Import] Button

Click on thi to diplay the [Open File] window. select the image to ue in the

Background tone.

・[Scale]

set the ize of the [Background] tone image.

・[Brightness]

set the brightne of the [Background] tone image.

・[Contrast]

set the contrat for the [Background] tone image.

・[Optimize At Next Load]

When importing the next page, the unued area are deleted and optimization

i performed.

A

BA

B

A [Shape]

select the gradation hape.

[Line] Generate the gradation in the direction of the line.

[Circle] Generate the gradation in the direction of the circle.

B [Repeat Type]

select the gradation pattern.

[Repetition]Repeat in the ame direction for each ize that i et with

[size].

[Loop]Revere and repeat in the ame direction for each ize

that i et with [size].

[None] Terminate the gradation pattern at the ize et with [size].

・[Ellipticity]

set the flatten rate for the circle. (Only when [Circle] i elected with [shape])

・[Size]

set ditance when repeating the gradation.

For example, when 5. 0 cm i et, the gradation repeat every 5. 0 cm.

・[Darkness Graph]

set denity by dragging the control point. Drag the control point off of the

denity graph to delete it.



Manga Studio

218

Manga Studio

Computones Format Tones (EX only)02

Computones BasicsThi ection introduce concept and uage.

Concept

Computone i a plug-in that can eaily apply a tone to an original image drawn

on a Manga studio Rater Layer, and verify with a tone brower. For each tartup,

one type of tone can be applied to a ingle [Tone Drawing Area].

Operation MethodOpen the tone brower and pate the tone.

1. Open the Page


3. Select the area

specify the area to pate the tone with the election.

The example elect the character' clothing.

Thi elected area i called the [Tone Drawing Area].(If a election i not made, the entire image become the [Tone Drawing Area])

4. Select a Command

select [Filter] Menu → [Computone] → [screen Tone...], in equence.

Click on the [select Tone set] box, and elect

the tone et. select [PT3-600-ALL] here.

The content of the elected 600dpi tone et content

i diplayed a a thumbnail in the [Tone set] are below.

5. Select a Tone Set

The Computone [screen Tone] window i diplayed.

Glossary

Thi ection introduce the term pecific to Computone.

screen Tone

The name of the "Computone for Manga studio"

plug-in.

For each tartup, one type of tone can be applied to

a ingle election (Tone Drawing Area).

Monochrome Tone

Thee tone are compoed of only "Completely

White" and "Completely Black." The Make Pattern

box i unchecked.

Gray ToneThee tone are compoed of 256 color tone

(gradation). The Make Pattern box i checked.

Tone setThi i grouped tone data.

The uer can alo create original tone et.

Tone Drawing Area Thi i the election area where the tone i applied.

Completely White Diplay white of 0% darkne.

Completely Black Diplay black of 100% darkne.

2. Select Layers

With the [Layer] window, elect the [Rater Layer] (1bit/2bit/8bit) to pate the tone.

supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit

Rater Layer ○ ○ X

Vector Layer X - X



Manga Studio

220

Description of Computones Functions"Computone" ([screen Tone] filter) are applied in image up to the et election. If there i no election, it i applied to the entire page. For normal ue, we recommend

pecifying the location where you want to pate the tone a the election.

A Title BarImage size・Image Mode diplayed.

B

Window FrameThe ize of the window can be changed by dragging.

With Window the entire frame can be reized.

C [Preview] AreaThi area diplay the execution proce and reult

of "Computone" function.

A croll bar i on the right and bottom, and the

diplay content can be crolled.

D [Filter Settings] information AreaThe [Title]/[Line]/[Denity]/[size] data for the

elected tone i diplayed.

(When the window i mall, not all data can be

diplayed)

E [Preview Display Mode] ButtonBy witching on/off, elect whether to diplay

only the layer where the tone i applied (off) or to

cacade all diplayable layer (on). Although the

tone i hown on top regardle of the elected

layer, it i applied to the original layer' poition

after [OK].

F [Preview Display Ratio] BoxThe magnification of the image hown in the

[Preview] area can be changed.

The magnification can be elected from 13 level of

5. 0% ~ 800. 0%, jut a the [Zoom] tool.

Thi function only change the diplay magnification

and doe not influence the tone ize.

G [Image Resolution] AreaThe reolution (document ize) of the image hown

in the [Preview] i diplayed unit of dpi.

H [Hand Tool] ButtonThe curor become the [Hand] tool, and the

content diplayed in the [Preview] area can be

moved by dragging.

Thi kind of diplay poition operation can alo

move the [Preview] area croll bar.

Different from the [Move] tool, pated tone and

pin can be moved.

I [Move Tool] ButtonThe curor become the [Move] tool, and the

poition where tone are pated and pin diplayed

in the [Preview] area can be moved imultaneouly

by dragging.

Different from the [Hand] tool, image cannot be

moved.

While dragging, area other than the tone drawing

area are diplayed in pink.

J [Rotate Tool] ButtonThe curor become the [Rotate] tool, and the pate

location of the tone can be rotated about the pin

by dragging.

When the effect i hard to ee, pating a tone with

a large pattern make it eaier to ee.



K [Zoom Tool] ButtonThe curor become the [Zoom] tool, and the content

diplayed in the [Preview] area can be zoomed in or out

by dragging.

Zoom in by clicking on the image; zoom out by holding

down the [Alt] key while clicking on the image.

The magnification can be elected from 13 level of

5. 0% ~ 800. 0%.

Thi function only change the diplay magnification

and doe not influence the tone ize.

L [Pin Tool] ButtonThe curor become the [Pin] tool, and center (pin)

when rotating the tone can be moved by clicking.

The pin location i et to the Top Right of the image

in the initial etting.

M [Scale Tool] ButtonThe curor become the [scale] tool, and the tone

ize can be changed by dragging.

With the pin a the center and the vertical/

horizontal apect ratio maintained, reduce the ize

by moving cloer to the pin, and increae the ize

by moving away from the pin.

The modified cale i diplayed in the [scale Input]

box. ([scaling can alo be done by directly inputting

value in the [scale Input] box)



When binary monochrome tone are elected, the

curor become the [Prohibit Mark], and the caling

operation cannot be done.

A

B

C

DEF G

H

I

K

J

L

M

N O

P

Y

Z

a

b

c

d

e

f

U V

W

X

QR

S

T

h

g

i

j k l m n



Editing

Chapter 8

This chapter introduces the functions for editing line and image data.

Step: 01 Cut and Pate 228

Step: 02 Edit Lining 232

C h a p

t e r

8

E d i t i n g

Step: 03 Move and Tranform 237

Step: 04 Retouching 241

Step: 05 Black-White Reveral and Making 251



User Guide

227

C h a p

t e r

8

E d i t i n g

Copying to another ApplicationThe image content i copied to the Os clipboard. The copied content can be pated

into another application through the Os clipboard.

1. Open the Page

Open the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.select the layer from the [Layer] palette.

Create a election. Refer to "Chapter 6. selection"(⇒ p. 169) for creating the

election.


select the [Copy to Another Application] command from the [Edit] menu.

The election portion of image i copied to Os clipboard, and the image remain

unchanged.

The content copied to the Os clipboard can be pated to another active application

through the [Pate] command.

Explanation

List of Clipboard-Supported Layers

The image layer that upport copying to clipboard are lited below.


[Rater Layer]

[Vector Layer]


[Making Layer]

[selection Layer]

[Text Layer]


[Panel Ruler Layer]



Manga Studio

228

PastingThe content copied to the clipboard i pated onto image.

1. Open the Page


Pasting with Transparent WhiteThe content copied to the clipboard i pated with [White] of the drawing color

made [Tranparent].


select the [Pate White Tranparent] command from the [Edit] menu.

1. Open the Page


A new layer i created, and the clipboard content i pated to the original poition.


select the [Pate] command from the [Edit] menu.



User Guide

229

C h a p

t e r

8

E d i t i n g

The content copied to clipboard i pated with the color denity et to opaque. Thi

i only poible for a 32-bit rater layer.

Pasting with Opaque Color(32-Bit Only)

A new layer i created, and the clipboard content i pated to the original poition

with [White] drawing color portion changed to [Tranparent].

1. Open the Page


A new layer i created, and the clipboard content i pated to original poitionwith the color denity changed to opaque.


select the [Pate Color Opaque] command from the [Edit] menu.



User Guide

233

C h a p

t e r

8

E d i t i n g

Change the width of the drawn line.


[Rater Layer]

[Vector Layer]


[Making Layer]

[selection Layer]


layer

[Ruler Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer]

When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Change Width Tool

Option] palette i diplayed.


A ～ L

same a [Join Line] tool. Refer to "Line Joining Tool"( ⇒ p. 233).

M [Widen to the Specified Width]

Increae (thicken) the line width to the pecified amount whenever

applicable.

N [Narrow to the Specified Width]

Decreae (thin) the line width to the pecified amount whenever applicable.

O [Expand to the Specified Magnification]

Increae (thicken) the line width by the pecified ratio whenever applicable.

(Vector layer only)

P [Reduce to the Specified Magnification]

Decreae (thin) the line width by the pecified ratio whenever applicable.

(Vector layer only)

Q [Set Constant Line Width]

Change to the pecified line width regardle of the original width. (Vector

layer only)

R [Entire Line]

Correct the entire line, and not jut the pecified portion. (Vector layer only)

L

I

J

K

E F

M

N

A B

C

D G H

O

P

Q R

Width Changing Tool (EX only)

Operation Method

select the line, and correct the line width.

1. Open the PageOpen the page through [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.

select the layer from the [Layer] palette.

2. Select the Tool

select the [Change Width] tool from the [Tool] palette.

3. Correct the Line

When the line to be corrected i elected, the line width i corrected.

1

1 Ue the [Change Width] tool to elect the portion where the line width i to be

corrected.

2 At the elected portion, correction i made uing the etting width in the

[Change Width Tool Option] palette.

2



Manga Studio

234

Correct the line drawn in [Vector Layer].

2. Select the Tool

Right-click the [Blur] tool from the [Tool] palette, and elect the [Edit Line] tool.

Operation Method

select the line drawn by vector, and correct it.

1. Open the Page



supported drawing layer [Vector Layer]


layer

[Rater Layer]

[Tone Layer]

[Revere Layer]

[Making Layer]

[selection Layer]

[Ruler Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer]

3. Correct the Line

When the line to be corrected i elected, the line i corrected.Edit Lining Tool (EX only)

When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Edit Line Tool


A ～ L


M [Join Line]

If the end of the line adjoin each other, they are joined by 1 line.

N [Smoothing]

Correct by moothing out line jag.

・[Round Angles]

Round the angle.

・[Correct Entire Line]

The entire line i proceed.

O [Eliminate Dust]

Clear away hort line remnant and uch like at the extreme.

L

I

J

K

E F

M

N

A B

C

D G H

O




Manga Studio

236

5. Transformation Completes

The image' [Move and Tranform] i completed.

If the guideline i not diplayed, click on the [Diplay/Hide Guideline] icon found on

the [Move and Tranform] tab of the [Propertie] palette to turn it ON.

Note

Viewing of the [Move and Transform] Tab

A [Cancel] and [Retry]

[Cancel] and [Retry] can be performed on the action in [Adjut Poition].

B [Flip Vertical] and [Flip Horizontal]

The image can be flipped vertically or horizontally.

C [Show Guide Line] and [Hide]

The diplay and non-diplay of the guide line can be toggled.

Diplay it for the cae of adjuting through the drag operation with diplay of

handle in the image' periphery.

D [Center Point]

Modify center point to Enlarge, shrink or Rotate. Click the button to move

center point to the poition you indicate.

E [Anti-aliasing]

Anti-alia when rotating or tranforming image. It i only valid for [Rater

Layer] or [selection Layer] of 8 bit or above.

F [Leave Original Image]

Leave a copy of the original image when moving or tranforming.

[Processing Types]

select the proceing from among [scale], [Rotate], [Free Tranform], [Ditort],

and [Perpective].

The dragging of handle in the image' periphery work in repone to the

elected proceing.

[Scale]

specifie the cale of the image in percentage of [Width] and [Height].

・ [Relative]: Input the ratio of change (caling) from the current condition. After

confirmation, it revert to 100%.

・ [Abolute]: Input the ratio of change (caling) from the initial condition. It

cannot be pecified if the image wa changed through the ue, uch a of

[Rotate], [Free Tranform], and [Ditort].

[Keep Aspect Ratio]

scale while keeping to the horizontal and vertical ratio of the image.

[Position]The image poition i pecified in mm for [Left] and [Top].

[Angle]

specifie the image' rotation angle.

A BC D

E F



Manga Studio

240

F [Use size as the value on screen]

Regardle of the etting and ' diplay magnification, the ize of [size

Preview] i reflected in the effect extenion for ditortion.

G [Hardness]

set the intenity of effect at pen' periphery.

H [Size Preview]

Diplay the preview of the [size] etting. The etting can be adjuted even if

the preview i dragged.

I Offset Settings Menu

It i poible to elect the direction of hift from among [shift in Forward

Direction], [shift Left], [shift Right], [Expand Center], [shrink Center],

[Compre to Left], [Compre to Right], [Extend to Left], and [Extend to Right].

J [Effect Amount]

set the ditortion' effect amount.

K [Reflect pen pressure in effect amount]

The pen preure of pen tablet i reflected to the ditortion' effect amount.

L [Tone Distort]

Ditort the tone pattern.

M [Also Distort Points]

Alo ditort the tone point (dot). When OFF, the point (dot) poition or hape

i not ditorted.



User Guide

241

C h a p

t e r

8

E d i t i n g

Applie peed line' blurring effect to image.

3. Blur the Line

When the area i elected, the peed line effect i applied to the image.

When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [speed Line Tool


A ～ L


M [Direction]

set the direction of the reultant peed line by angle.

N [Length]

set the length of the reultant peed line.

O [Length Disorder]

set the diorder of the length of reultant peed line.

P [Interval]

set the interval of the reultant peed line.

Q [Interval Disorder]

set the diorder of the interval of reultant peed line.

L

I

J

K

E F

A B

C

D G H


M

N

Q

O

P

Operation Method

select the area, and apply the peed line effect.

1. Open the Page



2. Select the Tool

Right-click the [Blur] tool from the [Tool] palette, and elect the [speed Line] tool.


[Rater Layer]


[Making Layer]

[selection Layer]


[Vector Layer]

[Ruler Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer]

Speed Lines Tool(EX only)



Manga Studio

246

Mixe color at portion of the image.

3. Correct the Image

The color are mixed and applied to the dragged portion of the drawing.

Operation Method

Mix and blur the color of the dragged portion.

1. Open the Page



2. Select the Tool

Right-click the [stamp] tool f rom the [Tool] palette, and elect the [Color

Mixing] tool.

Color Mixing Tool (EX only)

[Before Color Mixing]

[After Color Mixing]

Concept

It i poible to bring out the effect a if the paint are mixed with the finger.

supported drawing layer[Rater Layer](8-bit/32-bit)

[selection Layer](8-bit)


[Rater Layer](1-bit/2-bit)

[Vector Layer]

[Tone Layer]

[Revere Layer]

[Making Layer]


[Ruler Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer]



Manga Studio

248

Partially darken the image.

3. Correct the Image

The color of the dragged portion darken.

Operation Method

Darken the dragged portion.

1. Open the Page



2. Select the Tool

Hold down the [stamp] tool from the [Tool] palette, and elect the [Burn] tool.

Burning Tool (EX only)

[Before Burning]

[After Burning]

Concept

The light expoure of the pecified portion i lifted and it darken.

supported drawing layer[Rater Layer](8-bit/32-bit)



[Rater Layer](1-bit/2-bit)

[Vector Layer]

[Tone Layer]

[Revere Layer]

[Making Layer]


[Ruler Layer]

[Panel Ruler Layer]



Manga Studio

250

A mak ([Making Layer]) i created and the covered portion of the image i made

to diplay tranparently.

The [Panel Folder] i mainly ued o that the image that jut out of the panel

frame are not diplayed.

Thi i not retricted to the [Panel Folder], and page can alo be imilarly maked.

Concept

Making i applied to the image in the panel folder.

Masking Layer(Such as Panel Folder)

[Page Image]

[Panel Folder] Image

・[Masking Layer] is OFF

The image of a character drawn in the [Panel Folder] jut into and overlap the

panel below.

[Panel Folder] Image

・[Masking Layer] is ON

[Page Image]

Due to [Making Layer], the protruding portion of the character drawn in the

[Panel Folder] i hidden and i not diplayed in the panel below.



User Guide

251

C h a p

t e r

8

E d i t i n g

Operation Method

1. Open the Page


2. Open the Panel Folder

Open the [Layer] palette, and double-click the [Panel Folder] icon.

The [Panel Folder] i opened.

Create the [Panel Folder], and create the [Making Layer].

3. Create the Layer

Open the [Layer] palette, and click the [Create New Layer] button.

The [New Layer] dialog i diplayed.

1 select [Making Layer].


2

4. Create the Masking Image

Create the mak on the [Making Layer] with drawing tool.

1



Manga Studio

256

A [Hand]

Adjut the image' poition on the creen.

B [Add Vanishing Point to the Clicked Position]

Create a vanihing point by clicking on the image.

You can alo move a vanihing point by clicking and dragging the center mark.

C [Add Guide Line for Vanishing Point to the Clicked Position]

Add a line to the vanihing point by clicking on the image.

D

[Delete Selected Points]select vanihing point center mark (they will turn red) and click the Trah Can

to delete them.

・[Line Interval]

set the interval angle for drawing line. Thi affect the number of line.

・[Apply Settings To All Vanishing Points]

Apply the current etting to the line for all vanihing point.

・[Set Auxiliary Lines]

Create vanihing point line. Chooe the [Object selector] Tool and drag the

point to adjut the poition of the line.

Enable [snap] on the [View Menu] and elect [set snap Point] > [Perpective]to ue it like a Perpective Ruler.

・[Line Color]

set the color of viewpoint line. You can only et thi feature when [set

Perpective Ruler] i elected.

・[Actual Line Rendering]

Draw actual line along the vanihing point line.

・[Thickness]

set the width of vanihing point line.

・[Clear Layer]

Clear all drawing content from the elected layer.

[Vanishing Point Filter] DialogVanishing PointsThi filter et a vanihing point and draw guideline in the image for perpective

drawing.

When the dialog appear, elect the [Add Vanihing Point] icon and click

anywhere in the image to create a vanihing point. Update the etting for an

exiting [Vanihing Point] by double-clicking the layer icon.

You can change the poition of exiting guideline in a layer by moving them on

the [Page].

A B C D

Manga Studio

Rendering Filters02

These filters are used to render new drawings directly onto the image.


Rater Layer ○ ○ ○

Vector Layer × - ×

[Vanihing Point]

select [Drawing] → [Vanihing Point...] from the [Filter] menu.

For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).



User's Guide

257

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

A [Hand]


B [Move]

Click on the image to create a center point for the Focu Line. You can alo

move the point by clicking and dragging it.

C [Move Drawing Position]Change the hape of the tarting draw poition (red line) of the Focu Line

line by drawing with the pen.

D [Transform Drawing Position]

Tranform the hape of the tarting draw poition (red line) of the Focu Line

line by dragging it.

・[Preview]

select the quality of the preview image ([High Quality]/[Mid Quality]/[Low Quality])

or chooe [None].

・[Preview Setting](EX only)

select from previouly recorded etting for Focu Line.

・[Length]

set the length of the Focu Line line.

・[Width]

set the width of the Focu Line line.

・[Distance]

set the angle interval of the Focu Line line. Thi affect the number of line.

・[Curvature]

set the curvature of the Focu Line line.

・[Displacement]

set the diplacement of the Focu Line line' tarting draw poition.

[Properties] Palette, [Focus Lines] Tab

Thi filter draw a Focu Line on an image.

It create a Focu Line with the poition, length and hape you indicate.

Update the etting for a Focu Line by double-clicking the layer icon. A B C D

Focus Lines

[Focu Line]

select [Drawing] → [Focu Line...] from the [Filter] menu.







Manga Studio

258

・[Random]

set the amount of randomne (if any) for each Focu Line etting ([Length],

[Width], [Ditance], [Curvature], and [Diplacement]).

・[Regenerate]

Regenerate the Focu Line if any of the [Random] etting in the dialog are et.

・[Distance]

set the ditance of the Focu Line line to the center point.

・[Arrange Curve Anchor]

Thi option i effective only if you've et a [Curvature] value.

When elected, the Focu Line line are placed with their vertice at the

ditance you pecify from the center point, and aligned o they do not cro

each other.

When not elected, the curve are drawn baed on the tarting draw poition

(the red line). The curve will not be aligned.

・[Stroke-in/Stroke-out]

set the tapering of the Focu Line line: [Inide], [Outide] or both.

・[Drawing/Background Color]

set the Drawing Color and Background (BG) Color of the Focu Line to one

of the following: [Black], [White], [Tranparent], [Black BG, Tranparent], or

[White BG, Tranparent].

・[Clear Layer]

Clear all drawing content from the elected layer and draw new Focu Line

line baed on the current etting.

・[Set Oversampling]

Convert the Focu Line to graycale and moothe any jagged edge.

・[Show Page Image in Panel Window]

select whether to how or hide the page image.

Speed Lines

Thi filter draw speed Line on an image.

It create speed Line with the poition, length and hape you indicate.

Update the etting for a et of speed Line by double-clicking the layer icon.

[speed Line]

select [Drawing] → [speed Line...] from the [Filter] menu.







User's Guide

259

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

A B C

A [Hand]


B [Move]

Click on the image to create a center point for the speed Line. You can alo

move the point by clicking and dragging it.

C [Move Drawing Position]

Change the hape of the tarting draw poition (red line) of the speed Line by

drawing with the pen.

・[Preview]

select the quality of the preview image ([High Quality]/[Mid Quality]/[Low Quality])

or chooe [None].

・[Settings](EX only)

You can chooe from previouly recorded etting for speed Line.

・[Lines]

set the number of speed Line.

・[Length]

set the length of the speed Line.

・[Width]

set the width of the speed Line.

・[Elevation Angle]

set the angle of the speed Line.

・[Curvature]

set the curvature of the speed Line.

・[Distance]

set the ditance interval between speed Line.

[Properties] Palette, [Speed Lines] Tab ・[Displacement]

set the hift of the speed Line' tarting draw poition.

・[Random]

set the amount of randomne (if any) for each speed Line etting ([Length],

[Width], [Ditance], [Curvature], and [Diplacement]).

・[Regenerate]

Regenerate the speed Line if any of the [Random] etting in the dialog are et.

・[Curve Alignment Level]

Thi option i effective only if you've et a [Curvature] value.

When elected, the speed Line are placed with their vertice at the ditance

you pecify from the center point, and aligned o they do not cro each other.

When not elected, the curve are drawn baed on the tarting draw poition

(the red line). The curve will not be aligned.

・[Taper]

set the tapering of the speed Line: [Inide], [Outide] or both.


set the Drawing color and background (BG) color of the speed Line to one ofthe following: [Black], [White], [Tranparent], [Black BG, Tranparent], or [White

BG, Tranparent].

・[Clear Layer]


・[Set Oversampling]

Convert the speed Line to graycale and moothe any jagged edge.


select whether to how or hide the page image.

[Edit Settings] Dialog (Speed Lines & Focus Lines)

・[Save Current Settings]

save the current etting.

・[Rename Settings]

Open the [Rename setting] Dialog, where you can change the name of the

elected etting.

・[Delete]

Delete aved etting.

・[OK]

Apply the elected etting.

From the [Focu Line] or [speed L ine] Filter Dialog, click the [Edit...] button. The

[Edit setting] Dialog will appear where you can tore etting that you've created.



Manga Studio

260

Thi filter draw a cloud pattern on the image.

Cloud Pattern (EX only)Thi filter draw a lightning pattern on the image.

set the poition of the lightning on the page. Ue the dialog to et other option.

Lightning Bolt (EX only)

[Cloud Pattern]

select [Drawing] → [Cloud Pattern...] from the [Filter] menu.




Vector Layer × - ×supported Color Depth 1/2bit 8bit 32bit



[Lightning]

select [Drawing] → [Lightning Bolt...] from the [Filter] menu.


[Lightning Bolt]



User's Guide

261

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s A B C

A [Hand]


Click and drag the center point of a lightning point to move it. Click and drag

the circular frame around a lightning point to change it ize or the ize of it

lightning bolt.

B

[Add Lightning Fork]Click anywhere in the image to add a lightning point.

C [Delete Selected Lightning Fork]

Delete all elected lightning point.

・[Line Width]

set the width of lightning bolt.

・[Type]

Chooe the type of lightning to create: [Bolt + Lightning], [Bolt] or [Lightning].


Chooe the drawing color and background (BG) color from one of thefollowing: [Black BG, Tranparent], [White BG, Tranparent] (2bit only), [Black],

[White] (2bit only), or [Tranparent].

・[Preview]

Preview your etting on the page.

[Lightning Bolt] Dialog



Manga Studio

262

Polar Coordinates (EX only)Thi filter project your image onto a cylinder or phere.

Chooe from [Convert from Orthogonal to Polar Coordinate], [Convert from Polar

to Orthogonal Coordinate], or [Reflection in spherical Body].

Manga Studio

Transform Filters03

These filters are used to transform your image.

[Polar to Orthogonal Coordinate]

[spherical Projection]

・[Convert From Orthogonal To Polar Coordinates]Convert your image from rectangular coordinate (in which all coordinate axe

are orthogonal) to polar coordinate.

・[Convert From Polar To Orthogonal Coordinates]

Convert your image from polar coordinate (which repreent radiu and angle)

to rectangular coordinate.

・[Reflection In Spherical Body]

Tranform the image a if it were projected on a phere.

[Polar Coordinates] Dialog




[Orthogonal to Polar Coordinate]

select [Tranform] → [Polar Coordinate...] from the [Filter] menu.




User's Guide

263

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

Wave (EX only)

Thi filter tranform your image with a rippling wave pattern.

・[Direction]

set the angle of the wave.

・[Amplitude]

set the amplitude of the wave.

・[Number of Waves]

set the number of wave.

[Wave] Dialog


Rater Layer○ ○ ○


[Wave]

select [Tranform] → [Wave...] from the [Filter] menu.




Manga Studio

264

Waveforms (EX only)

Thi filter tranform your image baed on a waveform (ine wave, etc.).

Chooe from a [sine], [Triangle] or [square] waveform.

[Rectangular Wave]

・[Sine]

Tranform your image' coordinate with a ine wave (a cyclically varyingwaveform).

・[Triangle]

Tranform your image' coordinate with a triangular wave.

・[Square]

Tranform your image' coordinate with a rectangular wave.

・[Regeneration]

Reapplie the waveform filter baed on the dialog etting.


set the number of wave.

・[Wavelength]

set the ditance between peak of the wave.

・[Amplitude]

set the amplitude of the wave.

・[Horizontal Scale]

set the horizontal cale of the waveform.

・[Vertical Scale]

set the vertical cale of the waveform.

・[Wrap Around]

Fill in pixel from the oppoite edge of the image.

・[Repeat Edge Colors]

Fill the image by extending the pixel at the edge of the image.

[Waveforms] Dialog




[sine Wave]

[Triangular Wave]

select [Tranform] → [Waveform...] from the [Filter] menu.




User's Guide

265

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

Spiral (EX only)

Thi filter tranform your image with a piral pattern.

Zigzag (EX only)

・[Rotation]

set the zigzag' degree of rotation.


set the number of zigzag wave.

[Zigzag] Dialog

Thi filter tranform your image with a waving pattern from the center of the

image outward.




[spiral]

・[Twist]

set the degree of twit.

・[Pull]

set the amount of pull in the image.

[Spiral] Dialog

select [Tranform] → [spiral...] from the [Filter] menu.





[Zigzag]

select [Tranform] → [Zigzag...] from the [Filter] menu.




Manga Studio

266

Brightness and Contrast (EX only)Thi filter adjut the brightne and contrat of your image.

Manga Studio

Image Adjustment Filters (EX only)04

These filters are used to perform adjustments to your image.

・[Brightness]

Adjut the image' brightne. small value make the image darker, while

large value make the image brighter.

・[Contrast]

Adjut the image' contrat (the relative brightne and darkne of part of

the image). small value reduce the contrat in the image, while large value

increae the contrat.

・[Auto Adjust]

Automatically adjut the brightne and contrat of the currently loaded

image.

・[Preview]

show a preview image on the page.

[Brightness/Contrast] Dialog


Rater Layer X ○ ○


[Brightne] = 100, [Contrat] = -25

select [Image Adjutment] → [Brightne/Contrat...] from the [Filter] menu.




User's Guide

267

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

Tone Curve (EX only)Thi filter generate a graph of the image' level that you can adjut. Click inide

the graph to add control point. Drag the control point to change the graph and

adjut the image. Drag control point outide the graph to delete them.

The horizontal [Input] axi repreent the original brightne value. The vertical

[Output] axi repreent the adjuted brightne value.

・[Tone Curve]

A graph for adjuting the intenity of color in your image. Drag the control

point to adjut the image.

The horizontal [Input] axi repreent the original brightne value. The vertical

[Output] axi repreent the adjuted brightne value.

・[Preview]

show a preview image on the page.

・[Reset]

Reet the image to it initial etting.

[Tone Curve] Dialog




[Tone Curve]

select [Image Adjutment] → [Tone Curve...] from the [Filter] menu.




Manga Studio

268

Level Adjustment (EX only)

Thi filter i ued to adjut the intenity of color in your image with a hitogram.

Move the triangular control point below the hitogram to the right to darken the

image, or to the left to brighten it.

If the hitogram doe not cover the entire width of the window, move the control

point to the peak of the hitogram. By etting the hitogram' width to fill the

window, you can adjut the entire image.

A [Histogram]

show a graph that contain information about the amount of darkne (left)

and brightne (right) in the image.

B Shadow [Input]

set the darket color in your image.

By default, thi i et to the leftmot point on the hitogram.

C Gamma [Input]

set the brightne of the midtone in your image.

D Highlight [Input]

set the brightet color in your image.

By default, thi i et to the rightmot point on the hitogram.

E Shadow [Output]set the depth of the darket color in your image.

F Highlight [Output]

set the depth of the brightet color in your image.

・[Preview]

show a preview image.

・[Auto Adjust]

Automatically adjut the level in the currently loaded image.

[Level Adjustment] Dialog

A

B C D

E F




[Adjut Level]

select [Image Adjutment] → [Adjut Level] from the [Filter] menu.




User's Guide

269

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

Hue/Saturation/Value (EX only)Thi filter adjut the three color component of your image in the HsV (Hue/

saturation/Value) color model.

・[Hue]

set the tint to adjut the level of red, blue and yellow and in your image.

・[Saturation]set the brilliance of your image' color to adjut the color intenity.

・[Value]

set the brightne of color in your image.

・[Input]

show the color in your image before adjutment.

・[Output]

show the color in your image after adjutment.

・[Preview]


[Hue/Saturation/Value] Dialog


Rater Layer X X ○


[Hue] = -86, [saturation] = 1, [Value] = 39

select [Image Adjutment] → [Hue/saturation/Value...] from the [Filter] menu.




Manga Studio

270

Bitmap (EX only)

Thi filter convert your image to only black and white, with no graycale.

・[Threshold As Reference]

Reduce the image' color to black and white baed on a threhold level you et.

・[Halftone Dither]

Replace the color in your image with geometric pattern of black and white

dot to imulate hade.

・[Random Dither]

Diffue the error that arie during color reduction into the urrounding area,

reducing the color to black and white pixel to imulate hade.

・[Threshold]

You can input a value here if you've choen [Threhold] from the [Type] lit.

Pixel with a value over the [Threhold] you et will be changed to black, while

pixel below that value will be changed to white.

・[Preview]


[Bitmap] Dialog




[Bitmap], Threhold = 75

select [Image Adjutment] → [Bitmap...] from the [Filter] menu.




User's Guide

271

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

Dust Filter (EX only)Thi filter i ued to remove any mall dut particle in your image. select an area

of the image you want to apply the filter to.

Manga Studio

Line Adjustment Filters (EX only)05

These filters are used to perform adjustments to lines in your image.

・[Size]

set the ize of the dut particle to be deleted.

・[Dust Color]

set the color of the dut particle to be deleted.

・[Drawing Color]

set the color that will replace the deleted dut.

・[Preview]


[Dust Filter] Dialog



Vector Layer O - O

[Dut Cleaner]

select [Line Adjut] → [Dut Filter...] from the [Filter] menu.




Manga Studio

272

Thi filter i ued to join diconnected line with mall gap between them.

Thi i ueful for creating completely encloed area for filling.

When ued on a [Rater Layer], thi filter ha the ame effect a the [Join Line] Tool.

When ued on a [Vector Layer], thi filter ha the ame effect a the [Edit Line] Tool.

Join Line

[Join Line] (Rater Layer)

Thi filter i ued to mooth out line in your image.

When ued on a [Rater Layer], thi filter ha the ame effect a the [Blur] Tool.

When ued on a [Vector Layer], thi filter ha the ame effect a the [Edit Line]

Tool.

Smooth

[smoothing] (Vector Layer)

Edit Line (EX only)Thi filter i ued to join diconnected line or mooth out line.



Vector Layer O - O

select [Line Adjut] → [Edit Line...] from the [Filter] menu.




User's Guide

273

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

・[Smoothing]

Correct haky line by moothing them out.

・[Join Width]

set the degree of moothing to perform.

・[Round Off Corners] (vector only)

Round off any harp corner in the line.

・[Correct Entire Line] (vector only)Perform moothing on the entire line.

・[Join Line]

Connect two line with a mall gap between them.

・[Join Width]

set the trength of the line joining function.

・[Browse Color] (raster only)

select the reference color for the image to f ilter.

・[Drawing Color] (raster only)

select the color to draw when joining the line.

[Line Edit] Dialog

Thi filter i ued to change the width of exiting line in your image.

Change Width (EX only)

・[Widen To Specified Width]

Widen the line to the pecified width.

・[Narrow To Specified Width]

Narrow the line to the pecified width.

・[Expand To Specified Scale] (vector only)

Magnifie the line by the pecified cale.

・[Reduce To Specified Scale] (vector only)

shrink the line by the pecified cale.

・[Set To Constant Thickness] (vector only)

set the line to the pecified width.

・[Process The Entire Line] (vector only)

Perform Change Width on the entire line.

[Change Width] Dialog



Vector Layer O - O

[Change Width] (Vector Layer)

select [Line Adjut] → [Change Width...] from the [Filter] menu.




Manga Studio

274

Mosaic (EX only)Thi filter add a moaic effect to the diplayed image.

The moaic effect i created a a new [Tone Layer]. You can add to them or adjut

their etting jut like normal tone.

Manga Studio

Effect Filters (EX only)06

These filters add special effects to your images.

Thi filter i ued when you want to harpen a blurry image or make hape more

ditinct. It harpen the image by increaing the contrat along boundary line.

There are two filter: [sharpen] and [sharpen (Heavy)].

Sharpen (EX only) /Sharpen (Heavy)(EX only)

・[Block Size]

set the ize of the quare that make up the moaic.

[Mosaic] Dialog

[Moaic]

select [Effect] → [Moaic...] from the [Filter] menu.





[sharpen (Heavy)]

select [Effect] → [sharpen...] or [sharpen (Heavy)] from the [Filter] menu.




User's Guide

275

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

Posterization (EX only)

Thi filter adjut the number of hade in the image.

Invert Tone (EX only)

Thi filter revere the color in your image. The RGB (red/green/blue) and Alpha

(tranparency) channel will be inverted.

Black will be changed to white, and vice-vera.

・[Posterization Level]

set the level of poterization to be performed.

・[Preview]


[Posterization] Dialog




[Poterization]

select [Effect] → [Poterization...] from the [Filter] menu.





[Invert Tone]

select [Effect] → [Invert Tone] from the [Filter] menu.




Manga Studio

276

Manga Studio

Blur Filters (EX only)07

This filter blurs your image.

Gaussian Blur (EX only)Thi filter moothe out your image. You can et the degree of blur you want.

Thi filter i ued to mooth out boundary line and harp area of your image.

[Blur] and [Blur (Heavy)] filter are available.

Blur (EX only)/Blur (Heavy)(EX only)

・[Blur Range]

set the range of the blur.

・[Preview]


[Gaussian Blur] Dialog




[Blur (Heavy)]

select [Blur] → [Blur...] or [Blur (Heavy)] from the [Filter] menu.For baic information on how to ue filter, ee Filter Baic (p. 257).




[Gauian Blur], 2mm

select [Blur] → [Gauian Blur...] from the [Filter] menu.




User's Guide

277

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

Radial Blur (EX only)Thi filter moothe out your image in concentric circle.

A B

A [Hand]


B [Move]

Move the center point of the blur.

・[Blur Range]


・[Blur Position]

select the blur direction from [Forward & Back], [Forward] or [Back].

・[Blur Method]

select the blur method from [Box] or [smoothing].

・[Preview]


[Radial Blur] Dialog




[Radial Blur]

select [Blur] → [Radial Blur...] from the [Filter] menu.




Manga Studio

278

Motion Blur (EX only)Thi filter i ued to mooth out boundary line and harp area of your image by

blurring them along a contant direction.

・[Blur Range]


・[Blur Direction]

set the direction in which to motion blur.

・[Blur Method]

select the blur method from [Box] or [smoothing].

・[Blur Position]

set the blur direction from [Forward & Back], [Forward] or [Backward].

・[Preview]


[Motion Blur] Dialog




[Motion Blur]

select [Blur] → [Motion Blur...] from the [Filter] menu.




User's Guide

279

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

Manga Studio

Drawing (Comic Filters Vol. 1) (EX only)08

These filters are used to render new drawings directly onto the image. They area included in "Comic Filters Vol. 1" (sold separately).

Thi filter create a fanciful, "parkling" pattern.

Sparkle (EX only)

A [Hand]

Adjut the poition of the preview window.

・[Settings]

You can elect and tore each parameter from the setting Menu.

For more detail, ee [setting] Dialog (p. 292).

・[Sparkle]

set the relative ize of the parkle effect.

・[Soft Focus]

set the ize of the oft focu effect.

・[Size]

set the ize of the particle (parkle and oft focu effect).

・[Amount]

set the number of particle.

・[Perspective]

set the perpective of the particle.

・[Random]

set a pattern to generate.

・[Drawing Color]

select the color to draw.

・[Clear Layer]


・[View Scale]

set the cale of the preview window.

・[Merge Page Image]

show the page image in the preview window.

[Sparkle] Dialog

A




[sparkle]

select [Drawing] → [sparkle...] from the [Filter] menu.




Manga Studio

280

Thi filter create a fanciful, "falling now" pattern.

Soft Focus (EX only)

A [Hand]


・[Settings]



・[Thickness]

set the relative ize of the oft focu effect.

・[Amount]

set the number of nowflake.

・[Perspective]

set the perpective of the nowflake.


set the angle from the ky that the nowflake fall in.

・[Tilt]

set the amount the now lean from left to right.

・[Random]


・[Drawing Color]


・[Clear Layer]


・[View Scale]




[Soft Focus] Dialog




[soft Focu]

select [Drawing] → [soft Focu...] from the [Filter] menu.


A



User's Guide

281

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

Thi filter i ued to create a random crohatch pattern.

Patterns (EX only)

A [Hand]


・[Settings]



・[Starting Darkness]

set the tarting denity of the crohatching.

・[Finishing Darkness]

set the ending denity of the crohatching.

・[Fineness]

set the detail level of the crohatching.

・[Random]


・[Direction]

set the direction of the crohatching.

When unchecked, the starting Denity value i applied to the center of the

election.


set the angle of the crohatching.

・[Drawing Color]


・[Clear Layer]


・[View Scale]




[Patterns] Dialog

A




[Crohatching]

select [Drawing] → [Pattern...] from the [Filter] menu.




Manga Studio

282

Thi filter i ued to create a random lattice pattern.

It appearance i imilar to tained gla or a tone wall.

Random Grid Pattern (EX only)

A [Hand]


・[Settings]



・[Thickness]

set the width of the line.

・[Number Of Areas]

set the number of cell in the lattice pattern.

・[Random]


・[Drawing Color]


・[Clear Layer]


・[View Scale]




[Random Grid Pattern] Dialog

A




[Random Lattice Pattern]

select [Drawing] → [Random Grid Pattern...] from the [Filter] menu.




User's Guide

283

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

Thi filter i ued to create a rain pattern.

Rain (EX only)

A [Hand]

Adjut the poition of the image in the preview window.

・[Settings]



・[Length]

set the length of the raindrop.

・[Thickness]

set the width of the rain.

・[Rain Amount]

set the amount of raindrop.

・[Perspective]

set the perpective of the raindrop.


set the angle from the ky that rain fall in.

・[Tilt]

set the amount the rain lean from left to right.

・[Random]


・[Drawing Color]


・[Clear Layer]


・[View Scale]







[Rain]

select [Drawing] → [Rain...] from the [Filter] menu.


[Rain] Dialog

A



Manga Studio

284

2D Rotate (EX only)Thi filter allow you to view your image from different angle by adjuting the

angle of rotation along the X, Y, and Z axe.

Manga Studio

Distort (Comic Filters Vol. 2) (EX only)09

These filters are used to transform your image. They area included in "Comic Filters Vol. 2" (sold separately).

A [Hand]


B [X Axis]

The X axi i hown by a horizontal red line through the center point of thepreview window.

The amount of [X Rotation] i performed about thi line.

C [Y Axis]

The Y axi i hown by a vertical red line through the center point of the

preview window.

The amount of [Y Rotation] i performed about thi line.

D [Z Axis]

The Z axi i hown by a blue line perpendicular to the preview window

paing through it center point.

The amount of [Z Rotation] i performed about thi line.

・[Reset]Reet each parameter to 0. 0.

・[Perspective]

set the degree of perpective in your image.

・[X-axis Rotation]

set the amount to rotate your image about the X axi.

・[Y-axis Rotation]

set the amount to rotate your image about the Y axi.

・[Z-axis Rotation]

set the amount to rotate your image about the Z axi.

・[View Scale]




[2D Rotate] Dialog

A

B

CD




[2D Rotate]

select [Ditort] → [2D Rotate...] from the [Filter] menu.




User's Guide

285

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

Thi filter i ued to queeze the center of a elected area either inward or outward.

Pinch (EX only)

A [Hand]


・[Amount]

set the trength of the pinch effect.

・[View Scale]




[Pinch] Dialog

A




[Pinch]

select [Ditort] → [Pinch...] from the [Filter] menu.




Manga Studio

286

Thi filter allow you to add a "rotating" effect to your image.

You can et option with the [setting] button.BA




[speed Rotation]

select [Ditort] → [speed Rotation...] from the [Filter] menu.


Speed Rotation (EX only)

A [Hand]


B [Move Center Point]

Move the poition of the center point.

・[Settings]



・[Length]

set the length (i.e. intenity) of the peed line.

・[Length Disorder]

set the amount of variance in the length (i.e. intenity) of the peed line.

・[Interval (P)]

set the interval of the peed line.

・[Interval]

set the variance in the interval of the peed line.

・[Random]


・[View Scale]




[Speed Rotation] Dialog



User's Guide

287

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

setting] button.




[Ditorted Focu Line]

select [Ditort] → [Ditorted Focu Line...] from the [Filter] menu.


Distorted Focus Lines (EX only)



・[Settings]



・[Length]

set the length (i.e. intenity) of the peed line.


set the amount of variance in the length (i. e. intenity) of the peed line.

・[Interval (P)]


・[Interval Disorder(P)]


・[Random]


・[View Scale]




[Distorted Focus Lines] Dialog

A [Hand]




Manga Studio

288

A [Hand]




・[Settings]



・[Length]

set the length (i. e. intenity) of the peed line.


set the amount of variance in the length (i. e. intenity) of the peed line.

・[Interval (P)]


・[Interval Disorder(P)]


・[Random]


・[View Scale]




[Distorted Speed Lines] Dialog

AThi filter allow you to add a speed Line effect to your image.

You can et option with the [setting] button.




[Ditorted speed Line]

select [Ditort] → [Ditorted speed Line...] from the [Filter] menu.


Distorted Speed Lines (EX only)



User's Guide

289

C h a p t e r

9

F i l t e r s

Thi filter can be ued to tranform your image with a pherical or cylindrical hape.

Spherical (EX only)

A [Hand]


・[Amount]

set the trength of the effect.

・[Cylinder]

Project your image onto a cylinder.

・[Direction]

set the orientation of the cylinder on which to project your image.

・[View Scale]




[Spherical] Dialog

A




[spherical]

select [Ditort] → [spherical...] from the [Filter] menu.




Manga Studio

290

Thi filter let you ee the reult of a tranform involving viewing an object from a

180-degree angle.

Fisheye Lens (EX only)

A

A [Hand]

Ued to adjut the poition of the image in the Preview screen.

・[Distort]

set the degree of the ditortion.

・[View Scale]

set the diplay ratio for the Preview screen.


Overlay the page image on the Preview creen.

How to read the [Fisheye Lens] dialog

supported color depth 1/2 bit 8 bit 32 bit

Rater Layer ○ ○ ×


[Fiheye Len]

From the [Filter] menu, elect [Format] → [Fiheye Len...].

Refer to "Filter Baic"( ⇒ p. 257) for baic filter operation.



Rendering

Chapter 10

This chapter introduces the methods for importing photo and 3D data and then incorporating it into drawings.

Step: 01 2DLT (EX only) 294

Step: 02 3D sketching (EX only) 302

R e n d e r i n g

Step: 03 3DLT (EX only) 324

C h a p t e r

10



Manga Studio

292

Manga Studio

2DLT (EX only)01

The 2DLT rendering function is a drawing support function that imports a photograph and then converts it to lines and tones.

2DLT Rendering FunctionThi chapter explain the concept and operation of the 2DLT rendering function.

Concept

The 2DLT rendering function ha the following feature.

[Original Image]

・Data Save

Becaue a photo image i aved into the 2DLT layer folder, re-etting can be done

eaily.

[2DLT Rendering Image]

[Layer] palette

Supported 2D Images

Image of the following format can be imported.

supported Format BMP, JPG, PNG, PsD (Photohop), TIFF, TGA (Targa)

・ Converting a Photograph to Lines and Tones

Thi function take a 2-dimenional image (photo, etc.) and then render it into

a line and tone image. The line and tone are output to their own repective

layer, and therefore can be added to any image.

[Example of Ue]



User Guide

293

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

Operation Method

Photograph can be imported and then ued a background image.

1. Open the Page

Open the page through the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.

2. Select the CommandFrom the [File] menu, elect [Import] -> [2DLT...].

3. Make the Rendering Settings

A preview i diplayed on the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window. At the ame

time, on the [Propertie] palette, the [2DLT setting] tab -> [2DLT] tab are

diplayed.

The [Open] dialog will be diplayed.

1 select the image file.


1

2

1

1 Make the etting needed for 2DLT rendering. Refer to "2DLT setting"

( ⇒ p. 297) for 2DLT etting.



Manga Studio

294

4. Export 2DLTImage

A monochrome image i exported from the [Page] tab of the [Edit] window.

A [2DLT Layer Folder] i created on the [Layer Palette].

On the [Layer] palette, elect a [2DLTlayer folder]. Double-clicking thi folder caue

the [2DLT setting] tab of the [Propertie] palette to be diplayed, making etting

change eay.

Application

2 If neceary, adjut the [size] and [Poition] of the image by witching to the

[Move and Tranform] tab of the [Propertie] palette and then moving the

lider while viewing the image.

Refer to "Image File" in "Importing" ( ⇒ p. 44) for the operation of the [Move

and Tranform] tab.

3 Upon the completion of etting, click the [OK] button on any tab.

2

3



User Guide

295

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

2DLT Setting2DLT rendering etting i done uing the [2DLT setting] tab -> [2DLT] tab of the

[Propertie] palette.

setting related to [2DLT] rendering i performed.

・Select a resolution from the [Output Resolution]

Pop-up menu. Note that you cannot et a higher reolution than that et a the

tandard page reolution.

[Output Attributes]

select an output attribute.

・[Sketch]

Render the image uing the ketching attribute. Note that when you elect

[sketch Ue], then [Multiple Tone Gradation] cannot be elected for [shading].

・[Finish]

Render the image uing the Finih attribute.

Rendering Setup

・[Shading]

Perform the etup for the [2DLT] [shading].

・[Raster Gradation]

Extract that hading with gradation. Poterize the input image, and then create

a ingle hading image layer.

・[Multiple Tone Gradation]

Extract thoe [Tone Layer] that have tone gradation. Poterize the input image,

and then create multiple tone layer.

Import Image

You can now import image for 2DLT rendering by dragging and dropping image

file onto a page in the [Edit] window’ [Page] tab.

1 select the file icon you want to import.

1

2

2 Drag and drop the elected file icon onto the page being hown in the [Edit]

window.

3 When the [select Proce] dialog appear, click the [2DLT] radio button.


3

4



Manga Studio

296

Outline Setting

・[Outline Width]

You can adjut the line width that i ued when line are extracted from the

image layer. If we aume that, immediately after import, a tandard image i

"0", then adjutment can be made within a range of ＋－ 5.

specifying a poitive value caue the outline to become thicker, while anegative value make them thinner.

Make the etting related to [Outline] for [2DLT].

[Outline Width] ＋ 3

[Outline Width] -3

[Original Image]

・[Detection After Posterization]

The outline are extracted after poterization i done uing the pecified value.

Thi poterization ha no effect on the poterization layer.

・[Number Of Gradations]

You can elect a value between 2 and 20 for the poterization level.

・[Apply Smoothing]

To prevent the appearance of jaggie, an appropriate level of moothing i

applied.

5 While the image i being imported, the [Propertie] palette will appear and

how the current etting on the [2DLT setting]→ [2DLT] tab.

6 select the etting you want on the [Propertie] palette and click the [OK] button.

5

6

7

7 The image will be rendered in black & white on the page.

8

8 A [2DLT Layer Folder] will be created for the imported image on the [Layer] palette.



User Guide

297

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

[Edge Height Threhold]: 10. 0

[Variation slope Threhold]: 10. 0

[Blur Range]: 3. 0

[Edge Height Threhold]: 0. 0

[Variation slope Threhold]: 0. 0

[Blur Range]: 0. 5

・[Blur Range]

Adjut the blur range without detecting the outline.

・[Carry Out Ver. 3 Processing]

Perform proceing uing the Ver. 3.0 algorithm. A the algorithm are lightly

different, the reult will alo differ lightly.

* The original image i the ame a for [Extract Outline 1].

・[Edge Height Threshold]

You can adjut the height of thoe edge that are extracted a an outline,

reducing the value to obtain the optimum edge height, o that a light change

i detected a being a line.

・[Variation Slope Threshold]

For the amount by which the outline thickne i changed, you can adjut

the continuity of the detected line. setting a larger value make horter line

eaier to detect. Good reult are obtained by etting a value of around 1/2 to1/3 of the [Edge Height Threhold].

・[Extract Outline2]

Ued when a more delicate repreentation i required.

[Outline Threhold]: 255

[Detection Direction]: [Top]・[Right]



[Detection Direction]: [Top]・[Right]


[Original Image]

・[Outline Threshold]

Uing [Outline Threhold], elect the gray denity threhold ued to extract

outline. The maller the value that you et, the wider the area that i taken a

an outline, and the greater the number of line that are detected.

・[Detection Direction]

specify the outline detection direction. For thoe direction for which the

checkbox i not checked, the outline detection will be weak.

・[De-noising Intensity]

Thi value can be adjuted when, for example, an exceive number of hadow

are detected.

・[Extract Outline 1]

The firt outline extraction method i given below. The ue of thi method i

uually pecified.



Manga Studio

298

[Black Fill Threhold]: (Initial Value)

[Black Fill Threhold]: After changing the threhold

・[Black Fill Threshold]

Ue the lider to adjut the threhold of the range to which black fill i applied.

Posterization

Make the etting related to [Poterize] for [2DLT]. While noting the relationhip

between the different value, move the lider to make thi adjutment.

[Original Image]

・[Posterization]

Adjut the poterization that i applied to the gray denity of the entire image.

Uing the lider, adjut the range threhold.

[Poterization] 2 layer

[Poterization] 4 layer

・[Match To The Tone Gradation]

Placing a check mark in thi box when you are etting [Tone Gradation] let

you imultaneouly adjut the etting of [Tone Gradation].

When thi box i checked, the [Poterization] lider i diabled.

[Original Image]

Clicking the bottom of the lider caue a △ to appear. The denity i et for

the poition that you click.

Clicking the right end of the lider caue the denity to be low, while clicking

the left end caue it to be high. To completely erae the hading, drag the 、

outide the lider.



User Guide

299

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

Prior to 2DLT proceing, a partial filter i applied to the image. Refer to "Chapter 9.

Filter"( ⇒ p. 255) for filter operation.

Preprocessing Filter

You can edit the ize and poition of a cene.

[Refer to [Move and Tranform] ( ⇒ p. 237) for the operation of the [Move and

Tranform] tab.

Move and Transform

Make the etting related to [Tone] for [2DLT]. set the image denity, number of

tone layer to be ued, and o on.

・[Tone Gradation]

You can et the tone denity.

・[Tone Lines]

Diplay the etting made with [Tone Gradation]. For the denity, clicking

the lider caue an editing box to be diplayed, in which you can adjut the

numeric etting.

・[Roughness of Grain]

Adjut the "Roughne of Grain" for the tone. setting a larger value make the

tone grainier. Note that thi etting cannot be made when [Match to the Tone

Gradation] i checked.

Tone Settings

[Tone Gradation] 2 layer (Initial Value)

[Tone Gradation] 4 layer

[Original Image]

Clicking the bottom of the lider caue a △ to appear. The denity i et for

the poition that you click.

Clicking the top of the lider allow you to adjut the tone denity. Clicking the

right end of the lider caue the denity to be low, while clicking the left end

caue it to be high. To completely erae the tone, drag the ▽ outide the lider.



Manga Studio

300

Manga Studio

3D Sketching (EX only)02

The 3D sketching function is a drawing support function that imports 3D data and then creates an image.

Thi chapter explain the concept and operation of the 3Dketching function.

[3D Data]

[sketching starting from a 3D Preview Image]

[Layer] palette

Concept

The 3D ketching function ha the following feature.

・Data Save

Becaue the 3D data i aved to the [3D Workpace] (3D Panel Folder), it i

eay to revie the etting for the layout and o on.

・Converting 3D Data to a 3D Preview Image

Thi function ue 3-dimenional data to create a 3D preview image. Thi 3D

preview image can act a a ketch for ue with a drawing tool.

[Example of Ue]

Basics of the 3DSketching Function



User Guide

301

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

1 3D object and camera layout are performed. Refer to "3D Object

Operation"( ⇒ p. 308 -) for the operation of 3D object, and "Camera

Operation" (⇒

p. 312-) for the operation of a camera.

4. Perform Drawing

Uing the diplayed 3D preview image a a ketch, perform drawing uing the

drawing tool.

・Uing [Import] of the [Propertie] palette, you can import multiple file for ue a3D object. Alo, becaue thee are diplayed in the center of the creen, exercie

care when importing thee one by one.

・ Double-click [3D Workpace] on the [Layer] palette. The [Propertie] palette will

be diplayed, allowing you to adjut the layout and rendering etting for the 3D

data.

Application

Operation Method

After importing a 3D file, create a 3D preview image (3D preview layer).

3. Make the 3D Object Layout Settings

Upon the completion of 3D data import, a 3D preview image i diplayed on

the page and, on the [Layer] palette, a [3D Workpace] (Layer Folder) and "3D

Preview Layer" are created.

On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, make the 3D object

layout etting.

1 select the 3D data.

2 Click [Open].

The [Open] dialog will be diplayed.

2

1

1. Open the Page


2. Import the 3D Data

From the [File] menu, elect [Import] -> [3D File].

1



Manga Studio

302

The following type of 3D data can be ued with the 3D Workpace.

3D object files

Supported 3D data

Thi i a 3D object file created with 3D oftware.

supported Format Note

LWO (LightWaveObject file)

(1)LWOB format

(LightWave4. 0-5.6) (2) LWO2 format

(LightWave6. 0-7.0)

OBJ

DXF Object defined with 3DFACE.

sHD (shade file)

Data converion i performed when an

sTC (shade/Mangastudio export file)

i imported, uch that the data may

have to be revied.

・Option: Texture mapping

The pating of a 2D image (texture) onto the urface of an object to give it a

textured appearance i called "texture mapping."

supported Format Texture image format Mapping method

LWO

(Light Wave Object file)BMP/JPEG/TGA

Planar mapping, Cubic

mapping, UV mapping

(UV mapping i upported

by LWO2 only)

OBJ (main MTL file) BMP/JPEG/TGA UV mapping

DXF Incompatible Incompatible

sHD (shade file) file content UV mapping

sTC (shade/Manga

studio export file)BMP UV mapping

LWs(Light Wave scene file)

Depend on containedLWO

Depend on containedLWO



User Guide

303

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

By converting multiple object file into a group, texture mapping, multiple poe,

parent-child relationhip, and rotation axe can be upported.

supported format Note

LWs (LightWavescene file) Verion 3 (Light Wave 6.0-7.0)

・Option: Parent/Child Relationship (LWS only)

The tate in which a mater/lave relationhip i maintained between part i

referred to a a "Parent/Child Relationhip."

・Option: Axis of Rotation (LWS only)

Among thoe file with a “Parent/Child Relationhip,” ome will have an

indirect tructure. such a file i called an "Axi of Rotation."

・Option: Pose (LWS only)

Multiple poe baed on "Parent/Child Relationhip" and "Axe of Rotation"can be aved. Thi allow you to elect a poe at import.

3D Scene File



Manga Studio

304

Operation Method

Drag the 3D frame onto the page, o a to create a 3D workpace,

3D Frame Tool

1. Open the Page


The [3D Frame] tool create the 3D workpace (3D panel folder).

2. Select the Tool

select the [3DFrame] tool from the [Tool] palette.

3. Create a 3D Workspace

Drag the [3D Frame] tool onto the page.

1 Click the [Import] button.

A 3D workpace i created on the page, a [3D Workpace] (Layer Folder) i

created on the [Layer] palette, and the [3D Workpace] tab i diplayed on the


The [Open File] dialog will open.

2 select the 3D data.


The 3D data i imported into the 3D Workpace.

1

2

3


When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [3D Frame Tool


A [Switch To 3D Selection After Creation]

After the 3D workpace ha been created, the [3D Frame] tool can be witched

to the [3D selection] tool.

A



User Guide

305

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

3D Selection ToolThe [3D selection] tool i ued to elect a 3D object in the 3D workpace

(3D panel folder).


When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [3D selection Tool


A [Move]

You can move a elected 3D object by dragging.

B

[Rotate]You can rotate a elected 3D object by dragging.

C [Scale]

You can zoom a elected 3D object in and out by dragging.

D [Show Manipulator]

Diplay the 3D manipulator.

3D object ha been rotated horizontally.

Operation Method

select a 3D object by clicking it in the 3D workpace.

1. Open the Page


2. Select the Tool

select the [3Dselection] tool from the [Tool] palette.

3. Manipulate the 3D Data

select a 3D object with the [3D selection] tool.

Manipulate the 3D object on the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette. In

thi example the [Horizontal] lider of the [Rotate] column i being operated.

A

B

C

D

A 3D object can be elected from the object tree of the [3D Workpace] tab of the


Explanation



Manga Studio

306

Manipulating 3D Objects

You can move a 3D object, rotate it, and change it ize.

3D Object Space

The pace in which 3D object are arranged i referred to a the [3D Objectspace]. The [Bae] of the grid within the [3D Object space] i ued a a guide for

arranging 3D object.

3D Object Move

After you have elected a 3D object, you can change the poition of that object

by moving the [X-Axi]/ [Y-Axi]/ [Z-Axi] lider in the [Move] column of the [3D

Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette.

1. Coordinates in the 3D Object Space

After importing a 3D object by electing [Import...] -> [3D File...] from the

[File] menu, the [Bae], [Vanihing Point] indicated with a blue [+], and the

[3D Workpace Center] indicated with an orange [+] are diplayed on the

page.

If a [Vanihing Point] i moved to a point outide the creen, the [+] direction i

indicated by ▲ . Immediately after import, the center of the 3D workpace will

appear in the middle of the 3D object pace. The workpace can be moved by

dragging.

2. Rotating [Vanishing Points]

By dragging a [Vanihing Point], the entire [Bae] can be rotated to either a parallel

or perpendicular orientation. Thi i convenient while the [Move] button i elected

and you want to rotate a [Vanihing Point].

Orange [+] Center of the 3D workpace

Blue [+] Y-axi grid vanihing point

line' [+] X-axi grid vanihing pointRed [+] Front grid vanihing point

Orange [+]:

Center of the 3D workpace

Blue [+]:

Vanihing point of

Y-axi grid

Blue [+]:

Vanihing point

of Y-axi grid

Orange [+]:

Center of the 3D workpace



User Guide

307

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

3D Object Rotation

After you have elected a 3D object, you can rotate that object by moving the

[X-Axi]/ [Y-Axi]/ [Z-Axi] lider in the [Rotate] column of the [3D Workpace] tab

of the [Propertie] palette.

3D Object Size

After you have elected a 3D object, you can enlarge or reduce the ize of that

object by moving the [size] lider in the [size and Perpective] column of the [3D




Manga Studio

308

3D Object Auto Adjust

After you have elected a 3D object, you can increae or reduce it ize to fit the

creen by clicking the [Auto Adjut] button on the [3D Workpace] tab of the


3D Object Ground

After you have elected a 3D object, you can ground that object to the bae line of

the 3D pace.



User Guide

309

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

3D Object Reset

After you have elected a 3D object, if you click the [Reet] button on the [3D

Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, the tate exiting when the 3D object

layout wa imported will be retored.

Operation with the 3D Manipulator

The [3D Manipulator] i ued to manipulate 3D object.

1. Display the 3D Manipulator

Uing the [3D selection] tool, click a 3D object.

2. Manipulate the 3D ObjectUing the 3D manipulator, manipulate the 3D object.

Y-axi move Drag the [Red] tr iangle A up or down

X-axi move Drag the [Green] triangle B to the left or right

Z-axi move Drag the blue triangle C forward or backward

Vertical rotation Drag the [Green] ring D vertically

Horizontal

rotation

Drag the [Red] ring E horizontally

X-axi rotation Drag the [Blue] ring F to the left or right

size Drag the gray ring G in the enlarge/reduce direction.

A

BC

D

E

FG



Manga Studio

310

Camera Operation You can adjut the camera' poition, rotation, and perpective.

Camera Selection

By electing [Camera] from the object tree, you can then elect a camera.

Moving a Camera

After you have elected a camera, you can change the poition of that camera

by moving the [X-Axi]/ [Y-Axi]/ [Z-Axi] lider in the [Move] column of the [3D


Distance between 3D Object and Camera

After you have elected a camera, you can change the ditance between the

camera and the object by moving the [Ditance] lider in the [Move] column of the

[3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette.



User Guide

311

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

Camera Rotation

After you have elected a camera, you can rotate that camera by moving the

[X-Axi]/ [Y-Axi]/ [Z-Axi] lider in the [Rotate] column of the [3D Workpace] tab

of the [Propertie] palette.

Using Perspective (Camera)

After you have elected a camera, you can change the perpective of a 3D object

by moving the [Perpective] lider in the [size and Perpective] column of the [3D




Manga Studio

312

Display AdjustmentOn the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, you can pecify how

imported 3D object are diplayed.

3D Object Show/Hide

When you click a 3D object on the object tree of the [3D Workpace] tab of the[Propertie] palette, that 3D object or part will be hidden.

Outlines

On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, remove the check mark

from the [Outline] check box to hide the outline.



User Guide

313

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

Shading

On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, the [Gradation Bar] can be

adjuted to a value whereby the hading i opaque.

Remove the check mark from the [shading] check box to hide the hading for

that object.

Active Display

On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette elect, from the [Active Diplay]

pull-down menu, the diplay method to be ued when manipulating a 3D object.

・[Box]

A 3D object can be diplayed in a quare frame.

・[Outline]

A 3D object i diplayed a an outline.

・[ Wire Frame]

A 3D object i diplayed a a wire frame.



Manga Studio

314

Texture Display (Texture Data Only)

On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, place a check mark in the

[Texture] check box. Thi enable texture diplay with 3D data for which texture i et.

Flip


[Flip] check box. The rear face of the object will be diplayed (rendered).

Normally, only the front face of a 3D object i diplayed (rendered). When rendering

i viewed from the rear, it appear tranparent. Therefore, whenever a rear face of

an object i rendered, it will be tranparent. ,

Explanation



User Guide

315

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

Both Sides Display


[Both side Diplay] check box. Both the front and rear face of the object will be

diplayed (rendered).

Normally, only one face of a 3D object i diplayed (rendered).

Explanation

Grid

On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, you can elect the type of

grid diplay to be ued.

・[Front Grid]

When you click the [Front Grid] button, a grid i diplayed on the front face of

the object.

・[Side Grid]

When you click the [side Grid] button, a grid i diplayed on the ide face of

the object.

・[Vertical Grid]

When you click the [Vertical Grid] button, a vertical grid i diplayed.



Manga Studio

316

3D Space RulersYou can create a ruler in the 3D object pace. Thi can aid you in your drawing work.

Rulers

After importing a [Ruler Layer], you can create a ruler in the 3D pace. Refer to

"Chapter 4 Ruler"( ⇒ p. 107) for ruler.

[Ruler] i diplayed in the object tree of the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie]

palette.


On the [Toolbar], click the [snap to Ruler] button.

3. Perform Drawing

The ruler i imported into the [3D Workpace]. An imported ruler can be

manipulated like a 3D object by uing the [3D selection] tool and o on.

Furthermore, if you create an image layer on the [Layer] palette, you can draw a

line on that image layer to which a "Ruler" in the [3D Workpace] will nap.

1. Import the Ruler

Create a ruler in the [Ruler Layer] uing a drawing tool like the [Line] tool.

On the [Layer] palette, drag the [Ruler Layer] to the [3D Workpace] (3D Panel Folder).



User Guide

317

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

Perspective Ruler

After importing the [Image Layer], you can create a perpective ruler in the 3D

pace. Refer to "Perpective Ruler"( ⇒ p. 123) for the perpective ruler.

1. Import the Image Layer

Create a new image layer on the [Layer] palette.


On the [Toolbar], click the [snap to Perpective Ruler] button.

On the [Layer] palette, drag the [Image Layer] to the [3D Workpace] (3D Panel Folder).

3. Perform Drawing

"Camera Focal Point" on the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette

can be ued a a vanihing point and perpective ruler.



Manga Studio

318

Basics of 3D Human modelsThi chapter explain the concept and operation of 3D human model.

Concept

3D human model have the following feature.

1. 3D Human models

Among the 3D cene file (LWs), thoe containing figure are referred to a

"3D human model."

2. Parts Can be Made Movable, Deleted

Becaue the LWs conform to a "Parent/Child Relationhip," for "3D human

model," the perpective can be made movable and deleted.

3. Waist Placed at Center

The wait (wait) of a 3D ketch figure i created a a parent part, uch that

movement or rotation of the entire figure i centered on the wait of the figure.

When you make a figure movable or rotate it, the proce progree from the

parent part to the child part.

[Propertie] Palette object tree

[Propertie]Palette object tree



User Guide

319

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

Pose Selection

3D human model are aved in a variety of poe, allowing you to elect a poe

when you import the 3D data. Refer to "3D sketching Function Baic"(⇒ p.

303) for the import of 3D data.

Using Perspective (Parent/Child Relationship)

Each part of a 3D ketch figure i aved with a "Parent/Child Relationhip," and

each part can be rotated (made movable), placed in a variety of poe, and deleted

on a part-by-part bai.

1. Select the Part

select a part of a 3D ketch figure uing the [3D selection] tool.

2. Rotate the Part

Uing the variou 3D manipulator a elected part can be rotated indirectly. The

lider of the 3D Workpace tab can alo be ued to perform thi operation.

1. Select a Pose

Diplay the [Open] dialog.

1 select the 3D Data.

2 Operate the lider, and then elect one frame ("X/X" of the preview indicate

the diplayed number of poe from which you can make a election).


2. Import will be complete.

The 3D ketch figure ha now been imported.

1

3

2



Manga Studio

320

Saving Poses and ScenesYou can ave a erie of poe, individual poe, and cene.

Saving Motions (Series of Poses)

You can make the part of a 3D object movable, and alo save that movement.

1. Select the Part

select a part from the Object t ree of the [Propertie] palette.

2. Move the Part

Move the elected part or 3D object into the poe that you want to save.

4. Check the Movement

By moving the lider, you can check each saveed motion key.

3. Save a Pose

When you click the [Add Motion Key] button, the motion at that intant i

saveed. The location i alo saveed and a tamp placed at that location.

2 I

1 Move the lider to the right.

2 Click the [Add Frame] button to save the frame.

To remove a key frame, move the lider to the poition correponding to the key

frame to be removed, and then pre the [Delete Frame] button.

Explanation



User Guide

321

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

Saving a Pose

save the poe of the object file (extenion: CsO).

1. Pose the Part

Move the elected part or 3D object into the poe that you want to save.

2. Save the Pose

Click the [Export] button on the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette.

1 select CsO for [File Type].

2 Click the [save] button.

The [save A...] dialog i diplayed.

The poe ha been aved.

2

1

Saving a Scene

save the cene a a cene file (extenion: CsD).

1. Perform Layout or Arrangement

Multiple elected 3D object can be laid out or arranged and then saveed.

2. Save the Scene

Click the [Export] button on the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette.

1 select CsD for [File Type].

2 Click the [save] button.

The [save A...] dialog i diplayed.

The cene ha been aved.

1

File Format Note

saving CsD (Manga studio Document) cene

File Format Note

saving CsD (Manga studio Document) poe



Manga Studio

322

Thi chapter introduce the concept and baic operation of the 3DLT rendering

function.

Concept

The 3DLT rendering function ha the following feature.

・Data Save

Becaue the 3D data i aved to the [3D Workpace] (3D Panel Folder), it i

eay to revie the etting for the layout and o on.

・Converting 3D Data to Lines and Tones

Thi function take 3-dimenional data and then export it to a line and tone

image. The line and tone are exported to their own repective layer, and

therefore can be added to any image.

[Example of Ue]

3DLT Rendering Function Basics

[Layer] palette

Manga Studio

3DLT (EX only)03

The 3DLT rendering function is a drawing support function that imports 3D data and then creates an image.

Image to which [3DLT rendering ha been applied]

[3D Data]

Supported 3D Data

The upported type of 3D data are the ame a for the『3Dsketching Function』.

Refer to "3D sketching Function"(⇒ p. 304).



User Guide

323

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

Operation Method

3DLT rendering i applied to 3D data.

1. Make the Rendering Settings

Import the 3D data to the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette.

Refer to "3D sketching Function Baic"( ⇒ p. 303) for the import of 3D data.

1 Click the [Rendering] button.

2 Make the neceary etting. Refer to "3DLT setting"( ⇒ p. 326) for the etting

method.

The [3DLT Rendering] dialog i diplayed.

2

Double-click [3D Workpace] on the [Layer ] palette. The [Propertie] palette will be

diplayed, allowing you to adjut the layout and rendering etting of the 3D data.

Explanation

2. Exporting 3DLT Images

A 3DLT image for which line and tone eparation ha been performed can be

exported to the [Page] window. A [3DLT Rendering Folder] i created in the [3D

Workpace] (3D Panel Folder) of the [Layer] palette.

1

3


2



Manga Studio

324

3DLT SettingsOn the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, click the [Rendering...]

button. The [3DLT Rendering] dialog will appear.

Outlines

Placing a mark in the check box caue rendering to be applied to the outline.

・[Line Width]

set the line width of the outline.

・[Raster Layer]

Perform rendering of the outline at the rater layer.

・[Vector Layer]

Perform rendering of the outline at the vector layer.

・[Details...] button

Diplay the [Outline setup] dialog.

Grid

Placing a mark in the check box caue rendering to be applied to the grid.

・[Resolution]

select a reolution for the grid correponding to the [Grid] button that i et to

ON. The maximum value that can be et i equal to the tandard value given in

the page file.

Smooth

Placing a mark in the check box caue moothing to be applied to the outline

and hading.

・[Level]

You can pecify the degree of moothing that i applied. The higher the value

that you et here, the longer the line that are ubjected to curving.

(Texture)

Make the etting needed for texture rendering.

・[Texture Resolution Image]

Perform image rendering from an object texture in order to perform 2DLT

proceing. Thi can only be applied to an object with texture.



User Guide

325

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

Shading

Placing a mark in the check box caue rendering to be applied to the hading.

・[Lighting Direction]

Drag the globe to et the direction of the light.

・[Posterization]

Poterize the hading.

・[Grayscale Bar]

Clicking the lider caue a △ to appear. The poition that you click determinethe denity. Clicking the left end of the lider caue the denity to be high,

while clicking the right end caue it to be low. Click the required number of

layer. △ will appear. To completely erae the hading, drag the △ outide the

lider. Click the denity to adjut it.

・[Convert To Tone]

Convert the hading to tone.

・[Type]・[Line]・[Angle]・[Size]・[Distort]

Conform to the tone etup. Refer to "Tone"( ⇒ p. 216) for the tone etup.

・[Raster Layer]

Perform rendering of hading that ha been converted to tone at the raterlayer.

・[Tone Layer]

Perform rendering of hading that ha been converted to tone at the tone

layer.

・[Raster Layer Resolution]

select a reolution for the [3D Workpace] (3D Panel Folder). The maximum

value that can be et i equal to the tandard reolution in the page file (the

actual data reolution will be the rater layer reolution of the import ource).

・[Clear Rendering Folder]

Clear the rendering folder.



Manga Studio

326

How to read the [Outline Setting] dialog

Perform outline etup.

・[Line Width]

You can et the width of the line ued to draw an outline.

・[Detection Accuracy[F]]

You can et the outline detection quality.

・[Outside Panel Accentuation[E]]

You can et the level of poterization that i applied to the outer line of an outline.

・[Depth]

You can adjut the depth by manipulating the line width graph. A the

difference between the maximum and minimum value of [Near] and [Far]

increae, the line are drawn to further emphaize the depth. Clicking add a

point to a graph, and the ubequent line will be f ine.

・[Apply Only To External Panel]

The outline tre effect i applied only to the outermot line.

・[Reset]

Retore the original etting.



User Guide

327

C h a p t e r

10

R e n d e r i n g

The four view conit of the upper view, front view, ide view, and perpective,

and allow a 3D object to be diplayed in any of four direction. Any 3D objectmove/tranform that i applied to one face i reflected on the other face.

On the [3D Workpace] tab of the [Propertie] palette, click the [Four View]

button.

Click the [Camera] button of the [Four View] dialog.

[Camera Operation] mode i et, uch that move and tranform are applied to the

camera.

Click the [OK] button of the [Four View] dialog to apply your changed etting to

the page.

Four Views

Concept

Thi chapter explain the concept and operation of four view.

Method 1: Display Four Views

Click the [Diplay Object Tree on Top View] button (or another of the button) in the

[Four View] dialog. The object tree will be diplayed on the correponding face.

Method 3: Display Object Tree

Method 2: Display Camera Operation Mode



Manga Studio

328

How to read the [4 Orthogonal Views] dialog

In the [Propertie] palette [3D workpace] tab, when you click the [4 Orthogonal View] button, the [4 Orthogonal View] dialog will be diplayed.

A [Select camera]

select a camera object.

B [Zoom in/Zoom out]

switch to the zoom in and zoom out tool.

C [Rotate]

switch to the rotate tool.

D [Move]switch to the move tool.

E [Undo]

Undo the previou operation.

F [Redo]

Redo the the undone operation.

G [Reset]

Return operation to when the dialog wa opened.

H [Auto-adjust]

Automatically adjut the ize of the object.

I [Perspective view adjustment]

Automatically adjut to a perpective view.

J [Hide the object tree]

Hide the object tree.

K [Display object tree in top view]

Diplay the object tree in the top view.

L [Display object tree in front view]

Diplay the object tree in the front view.

M [Display object tree in rear view]Diplay the object tree in the rear view.

N [Scale]

Adjut the cale of the elected image.

O [Show Page Image in Panel Window]

Diplay the page image.

A B C D F G H I J K L M N OE



Text and Word Balloons

Chapter 11

This chapter deals with text information input and how to create balloons.

Step: 01 Text 332

Step: 02 Balloon 348

C h a p t e r

11

T e x t a n d W o r d B a l l o o n s



Manga Studio

330

Manga Studio

Text01

It is possible to enter text from the keyboard onto the screen.

Text function basicsHere we will introduce the text function concept and operation method.

Concept

Uing the [Text] tool, it i poible to enter text with the keyboard. The entered text

can be managed per layer a a [Text layer].

Text toolText can be entered onto the page.

Operation Method

Nominate the poition, enter the text and ue the [Propertie] palette [Text]→

[Character etting] tab to finalize.

1. Open the Page


2. Select the Toolselect the [Text] tool from the [Tool] palette.

3. Nominate position

Click the moue on the poition where you want to input text.

Thi will open the [Propertie] pallet and allow you to enter text with the

keyboard.

Manga studio text file are Unicode.

Explanation



User Guide

331

C h a p t e r 1

11


5. Complete text input

Text input will finih and a new [Text layer] will be created.

4. Input text

When the text i input, a rectangular area [Text ize change guide] will be

diplayed (When not diplayed, thi ha been turned off in the [Propertie]

palette diplay etting).

When the urrounding are dragged, the text poition will move and if you

drag the quare handle, you can zoom in and out.

・ When changing the etting for one bit of text when entering, ue drag to

elect the text.

・ When you click on the [Text] tool after entering text, the [Text ize change

guide] will be diplayed and you can change the poition and ize by dragging.

・ When re-editing text, double click the [Text layer] icon or double click with the

[Text] tool and you can re-edit through the [Propertie] palette.

. When opening a file created on another computer, if a font i not available onthe computer being ued, the text will be diplayed in a replacement font and

will be diplayed in a red frame.

Explanation & Application operation

When [Tool Option] i elected from the [Window] menu, the [Text Tool Option]

Palette i diplayed.


・[Store in the text folder]

Create a [Text folder] in the [Layer] palette to tore the input [Text layer].

After entering text, in the [Text etting] tab in [Text] from the [Propertie] palette ,

configure the text and the text will be confirmed after clicking [OK].



Manga Studio

332

Text preferencesWith the [Text layer] elected from the [Layer] palette, when the [Propertie] palette i

elected from the [Window] menu, the [Text]→ [Character setting] tab will be

diplayed.

A [Show/Hide Character Size Change Guide]switch between diplaying or not diplaying the font ize change guide.

B [Show/Hide Dialog Balloon Size Change Guide]

switch between diplaying or not diplaying the balloon ize change guide.

・[Use style](EX only)ss

Make tyle etting uable.

・[Settings](EX only)

The [style etting] dialog will be diplayed and you can configure tyle

etting. For detail on tyle etting refer to『style etting』( ⇒ P. 338).

・[Font]select the font type.

・[Character spacing]

Adjut the width between character.

・[Line spacing]

Adjut the pace between line.

・[Size]

Adjut the text ize.

・[Specify %]

set the vertical pacing a a percentage of the text ize (size).

・ [Bold Face], [Italic Face], [Outline (Small)], [Outline (Large)],

[Underline], [Strikethrough], [Horizontal-in-Vertical]

Enable the variou character embellihment.

・[Ruby settings](EX only)

The [Ruby etting] dialog will be diplayed and you can configure ruby

etting. For detail on ruby etting refer to『Ruby etting』( ⇒ P. 335).

・[Delete ruby](EX only)

Delete ruby etting.

・[Align]

select from [Align Top], [Align Center] and [Align Bottom] for the line

alignment.

・[Text/BG color]

You can elect the text (drawing color) and background color.

[Black/

Tranparent]

Draw [Black] text on a tranparent background. Uually ue

in thi condition.

[White/

Tranparent]

Draw [White] text on a tranparent background. Ued when

inerting outline character on a black background.

[Tranparent/

Black]

Draw [Tranparent] text on a black background. The character

will be tranparent on the bottom image and can be woven

into tone, etc.

[Tranparent/

White]

Draw [Tranparent] text on a white background. The character

will be tranparent on the bottom image and can be woven

into tone, etc.

・[Vertical Text]

Enter text to be written vertically.

・[Outline]

Embellih the et white outer frame with text.

・[Preview the outer frame]

Preview the text white outer frame.

・[View Page Image]

Diplay the page image.

・[View Input Field]

Diplay an [Input field] (for inputting text) for pecial character, ymbol, etc

which are difficult to input from a keyboard.

A B

・ The [select ruby] button on the [Text etting] tab will only be available whilt

electing text.

・ The Manga studio EXP (special character) included in Font pack Vol.1 can be

ued after electing [Private ue] in the [Input field].

Note



User Guide

333

C h a p t e r 1

11


Operation Method

On inputted text it i poible to add maller reading of Japanee Kanji by the

[Ruby etting] dialog.

Ruby settings (EX only)The concept and operating method of ruby etting will be explained.

Concept

You can attach ruby (maller reading of Japanee Kanji) to the text.

1. Open the [Properties] palette


On the [Layer] palette, double click on the [Text layer] icon of the text you want

to attach ruby to.

2. Select text

The [Propertie] palette [Text setting] tab will be diplayed.

1 Drag and elect the text you want to attach the ruby to.

2 Click the [Ruby setting] button.

1

2

select the Kanji that you want to attach the ruby to.

Enter the reading of the character.

The Ruby will be attached.



Manga Studio

334

1 Input the ruby.

2 set the font, ize, etc.


3. Configure ruby settings

The [Ruby setting] dialog will be diplayed.

1

3

2

4. Ruby attachment is complete

Click [OK] on the [Propertie] palette.

Text with ruby i confirmed.

Ruby will be attached to the text.



User Guide

335

C h a p t e r 1

11


[How to read the Ruby settings] dialog

With the text elected on the page, it will be diplayed when you click the [Ruby

etting] button on the [Propertie] palette [Text]→ [Text setting] tab.

・[Target Text]

Up to 10 row of text which upport the ruby will be diplayed.

You are unable to input text from thi column; however, you can eparate the

line of text by hitting [Enter].

You can retore the eparated line of text by hitting the [Backpace] key.

・[Ruby]

Enter ruby for [supported text].

・[Font]

select the font to be ued in ruby.

・[Size]

select the ize of the font to be ued in ruby.

・[Set Font Size To 1/2 Main Text Size]

Automatically configure ruby font ize to be half of the original text.

Even after adjuting the ize of the original text at a later date, the ruby text

will automatically adjut to 1/2.

・[Position]

select from [Align Top], [Align Center] and [Align Bottom] for the ruby diplay

poition.

・[Adjustment]Adjut the ruby diplay poition.

・[Interval Between Main Text]

set the pace between the ruby and the original text.

・[Character Spacing]

select from [1 pace], [2 pace], [3 pace] and [Free] for the ruby letter pacing.

・[Set All Ruby As Target]

Allow all rubie uing the ame dialog.



Manga Studio

336

Style settings (EX only)The concept and operating method of tyle etting will be explained.

Concept

The combination of font, etc can be et for text.

Configure the [style etting] dialog.

Operation Method



On the [Layer] palette, double click on the [Text layer] icon of the tyle you

want to configure.

2. Select style

The [Propertie] pallet [Text setting] tab will be diplayed.

Hiragana: DFPKoIn-W4

Kanji: DFPKanTeiRyu-XB

Hiragana: DFPKanTeiRyu-XB

Kanji: En-POP

1 Check the [Ue style] check box.

2 You can elect from previouly created tyle here if preent.

3 When creating new tyle or changing the etting, click the [setting] button.

1

2

3



User Guide

337

C h a p t e r 1

11


The [style etting] dialog will be diplayed.

1 style etting will be created and aved per pattern.

2 You can elect from created tyle.

3 After etting the font, ize, etc, click the [OK] button.

1

2

3

3. Style settings are complete

Return to the [Propertie] palette.

style ha been et for the text.

1 Click the [OK] button

1



Manga Studio

338

[How to read the Style settings] dialog

With the [Text Layer] elected on the [Layer] palette, it will be diplayed when you

click the [setting] button on the [Propertie] palette [Text]→ [Text setting] tab.

・[Style]

Diplay and elect from the diplayed [style etting] lit.

・[New] button

The [Create new tyle] dialog will be diplayed and a new [style] can be avedto the lit.

・[Delete] button

Delete the tyle etting for the item elected in the [style] lit.

・[Font]

select the type and ize of [Hiragana Katakana font], [Kanji font], [special

character font], [symbol font], [One byte numeral font], [1/3 double ize

numeral font], [One byte alphabet font], [Punctuation mark font] (Punctuation,

bracket, repeat ymbol, etc font for ymbol).

When ize i et a [specify %], thi will be baed on the [standard Font size].

・[Line Spacing]set the pace between elect text and the next line by number of point.

・[Line Spacing (Specify %)]

set the [Line pacing] a a percentage of the current font ize.

・[Line Spacing When Saveing Ruby]

set the text [Line pacing] by number of point when aving ruby.

・[Line Spacing When Saveing Ruby (Specify %)]

set the text[Line pacing] a a percentage of the current font ize.


set the letter pacing by number of point.

・ [Bold], [Italics], [Underline], [Strikethrough], [Outline (Thin)], [Outline

(Thick)], [Edge] Enable various text effects.

Enable variou text effect.

・[Font]

select the font to be ued in ruby.

・[Size]

select the ize of the font to be ued in ruby.

・[Set Font Size To 1/2 Main Text Size]

Automatically configure ruby font ize to be half of the original text. Even

after adjuting the ize of the original text at a later date, the ruby text will

automatically adjut to 1/2.

・[Position]

select from [Align top], [Align center] and [Align bottom] for the ruby diplay

poition.

・[Adjustment]

Adjut the ruby diplay poition.

・[Interval Between Main Text]

set the pace between the ruby and the original text.


select from [Proportional 1], [Proportional 2], [Proportional 3] and [Free] for

the ruby character pacing.

・[Auto Half size Character Horizontal-in-Vertical Alignment]

Automatically configure entered text a horizontal in vertical. With [set

column], et the number of column of the half text in horizontal in vertical.

・[Options] list

[Automatically Ue One-third size Character For 3 Or More Half ize

Character], automatically adjut double apotrophe [“”], [〝〟] vertically

and pecial text [、]・[。]・[,]・[.]・[・]・[:]・[;]・[‘Automatically

adjut

,

]・

[“”]・

[()]・

[「」

]・

[《》

]・

[{}]・

[『』

]・

[【】

]・

[〝〟

]tobe automatically inerted.

[How to read the Create new style] dialog

A dialog within the [style etting] dialog [style] lit to ave a new tyle.

Thi will be diplayed when you click the [New] button on the [style etting]

dialog.

・[Source style]

select the ource for the tyle from the [style etting lit].

・[New style name]

Configure the name of the new tyle.



User Guide

339

C h a p t e r 1

11


Import a text file a a [Text layer].

Import text (EX only) 4. Import is complete.

It will be imported a a [Text layer] in the top right of the page window.

If, in the text file, there i pacing between the line, then the layer will be eparated

Explanation

1. Prepare the text


select [Import] → [Text file] from the [File] menu.

The [Open file] dialog will be diplayed.

1 select the [Text] file.


1

2

2. Open the Page


Prepare the text and ave a a text file (Extenion: TXT).

5. Move the text

select the [Text layer] that you want to move on the [Layer] palette, then, on the

page, move the curor near the text until the curor change hape, then drag the

text to where you want to move it.



Manga Studio

340

Export a [Text layer] a a text file.

Export text (EX only)

1. Open the Page

Open the title from the [story] tab of the [edit] window or open the page from the

[Page] tab.


select [Export] → [Text file] from the [File] menu.

The [save a] dialog will be diplayed. Confirm the ave name and location and

click the [save] button.

3. Export will be complete

It will be exported to the confirmed location a a text file (Extenion: TXT).



User Guide

341

C h a p t e r 1

11


The concept and operating method of [story editor] will be explained.

Concept

[story editor] i a function to unify the name (character) inide a tory and edit them.

search and replace and enter the dialog before drawing the picture.

Operation Method

In the [story Editor] dialog, enter and edit text.

1. Open the Page

Either open the title through [story] tab of the [Edit] window or the page

through the [Page] tab...


select [story editor] through the [story] menu.

Story editor (EX only)

Uing the tory editor, you can enter dialog for every page.

Dialogue will be imported a a text layer.

Layout the dialog and cut the name.

3. Select text

The [story Editor] will be diplayed (When there i already text entered, it will

be diplayed in eparate line).

1 Click the enter text box to elect. When entering new text, elect [Double click

and add text].

12

2 Click the [Change] button

1

2

3

4. Edit text

The [Text] dialog will be diplayed.



Manga Studio

342

5. Text editing is complete

The editing of the firt text box i complete.

・ [style editor] cannot be opened in [single page]. When creating from text, firt

create a new [story] by electing [Create new] → [Create] from the [File] menu.

・ The [Text] dialog will alo diplay by double clicking the text box in the [story

editor].

Note Application operation

1 When editing other text, elect the next text box and click the [Change] button and

follow from tep 4 onward. [Double click and add text] i for adding new text

and [Double click to add page] i for adding a new page.

2 When you click the [OK] button, the text edit will be aved.

1

2

[How to read the Story Editor]

Thi i a dialog to ummarize text editing.

Thi i diplayed when you elect [story Editor] from the [story] menu.

A [Page Row]

Diplay the number of page. Either double click or elect then click the

[Modify] button for the editing tatu of the [Text row] concerned.

Vertical pace will diplay the area of upported text.

B [Text Rows]

Diplay text and upported [Character] in layer unit. When you double click or

elect then click the [Modify] button, the text will be changed in the dialog.

If you lowly double click, you can directly edit the text.

・[Add text with double click]

A row of text with nothing entered. When you double click or elect then click

the [Modify] button, text can be input in the dialog.

If you lowly double click, you can directly edit the text.

・[Add page with double click]

A page with nothing entered. When you double click or elect then click the

[Modify] button, the page will be added.

・[Change] button

Add or refreh elected text or page.

・[Delete] button

Delete the elected [Text row] or [Page row]. However, page that already exit

in the [story editor] cannot be deleted.

・[Apply Changes] button

Reflect the current edited tatu of the [story editor] to the t itle.

・[Reload] button

Re-import text from the title and dicard unconfirmed editing change.

・[Import File] button

Import an external text file.

・[Search Text String]

Input the text you want to earch, click the [search up] or [search down]

button and [Text row] with correponding text will be diplayed.

select the [Text layer] that you want to move on the [Layer] palette, then, on thepage, move the curor near the text until the curor change hape, then drag the

text to where you want to move it.

A

B

1 Enter a new [Character] name or elect from a aved [Character] name.

2 Edit the text.




User Guide

343

C h a p t e r 1

11


How to read the Text] dialog

Thi i a dialog which allow you to edit [story editor] text and elect [Character].

Thi i diplayed when you double click on the [Text row] in the [story editor] or elect

the text and click on the [Change] button.

・[Replace Text String]

When checked, input the text you want to replace with the text you want to be

replaced.

When you click the [Replace] button, the text within the elected [Text row]

will be replaced.

When you click the [Replace all] button, all text within the [Text row] will be

replaced.

・[Style]

select a tyle etting from thoe aved in the [setting] button dialog.

・[Font]

select the type and ize of the font in the [Text row].

・[Apply to all] button

Apply the elected [style] or [Font] etting to all [Text row].

・[Follow Existing Text Settings]

The font information for the elected text will match the etting for exiting text.

・[Character]

Input, diplay and elect the correponding character name from the text. In

initial etting, [None], [stage direction], [Narration] are aved.

A [Recycle bin]

Delete the elected [Character].

・[Text input area]

Input, diplay and edit text.

・[Specify Character from materials]

The [select character] button and option checkbox can be ued.

・[Specify character] button

select a [Character] from amongt the aved [Character material].

・[Show All Story Characters]

In the [select character] button election menu, diplay all of the aved

[Character material].

When the checkbox i unticked, the combined title [Character material] will be

diplayed. (Title i the et [Name of title] when aving the [Character material].

Thi title i recing from the [New title] dialog [Title information] or the [story]

menu [Modify title information] [Title information] dialog)

・[Do Not Show Same Character]In the [select character] button election menu, when there are multiple ave

of the ame [Character material], only diplay once.

・[Separate Layer with Black Line]

When entering text, if a pace i added, then the eparated text will how a

[Text row] in the [story editor].

B



Manga Studio

344

Associate a [Character material] to dialog.

When a [Character material] i aociated with text in the [story editor], the

correponding [Character material] can be ued from the text. Refer to『Character

material baic』( ⇒ P. 376) for more on [Character material].

2 Turn the [specify Character From Material] check box on.

3 Click the [select character] button.

2. Associate character material

select [story editor] from the [story] menu and the [story editor] will be diplayed.

1 select the text and click the [Change] button.

1

1. Open the Page or Title Either open the title through [story] tab of the [Edit] window or the page

through the [Page] tab.

5 Return to the [Text] dialog and click [OK].

The lit of aved [Character material] will be diplayed.

4 select the [Character material].

2 3

5

4

The [Text] dialog will be diplayed.

The [story editor] will be diplayed.

7 Click [OK] when all editing i complete.

6 An thumbnail image of the [Character material] will be diplayed.

6

7



User Guide

345

C h a p t e r 1

11


3. Use character material

From the [Propertie] palette [Material] tab, the [Character material] will be

reflected on the page.

In the [Layer] palette, when you elect [Text layer], on the [Propertie] palette

[Material] tab, the aociated [Character material] will be diplayed.

[Character material] can be freely pated on to the page. Refer to『Charactermaterial baic』( ⇒ P.376) for more on [Character material].

Here, [Pate layer] wa elected. Every layer aved a [Glae] will be elected and

i available for ue.



Manga Studio

346

Balloon function basicsThe concept and operating method of balloon function.

Concept

The balloon, the [Text] inide and the urrounding [Balloon image] will be treated

a an image.

In the [Layer] palette, the [Text layer] and balloon will be treated together a a

[Balloon layer].

A balloon ha the following element:

A [Text]

Text input via the keyboard.

B [Balloon image]

The balloon material image.

C [Tail]

The connector between the balloon and the character.

BA

C

・[Raster balloon]

A rater type balloon created from a rater image.

Thi i uited when creating a complicated haped balloon.

Types of balloonsThere are [Rater balloon] and [Ruler balloon] which have variou characteritic.

Balloon upporting functionRater

balloon

Ruler

balloon

Create [Tail] × ○

Modify balloon line thickne and color × ○

Balloon fill color × ○

Balloon fill color by tone × ○

Create free tyle balloon ○ △

Balloon which are not connected by line cannot be filled.

NoteUsing balloons

Balloon can be ued by dragging and dropping a balloon material aved in the

[Material] palette onto the page.

Manga Studio

Balloons02

Create a balloon around the text and complete the dialogue.

・[Ruler balloon] (Vector)

A vector type balloon created from a ruler.

The balloon line can be edited later.



User Guide

347

C h a p t e r 1

11


Create balloons (EX only)

When creating balloon, you can ave and ue an image a [Balloon material] or

create directly from [Text layer].

When creating from text, you can only create a ruler (vector) balloon.

Method 1: Save pattern as balloon material A method to ave the balloon frame ketched onto the page a [Balloon material]

and ue a required from the [Material] palette.

[Tone layer] can alo be aved a a [Balloon material].


Method 2: Create balloon

A method to create a [Ruler balloon] directly from a [Text layer].

A thi i a vector attribute, you can change the balloon line in detail.

1. Open the Page


Click the deired poition and enter the text to create a [Text layer].

Can be aved from the [Edit] menu, [save pattern to balloon material]. For detail,

refer to『saving pattern a balloon material』( ⇒ P.61)

How to create a balloonRater

balloon

Ruler

balloon

save pattern a balloon ○ ○


balloon

Ruler

balloon

Create balloon × ○

2. Select the Tool select the [Text] tool from the [Tool] palette.



Manga Studio

348

3. Create a balloon

Diplay the [Propertie] palette through the [Window] menu, from [Text] tab→

[Balloon etting] tab will be diplayed.

A balloon will be created and the [Generate Dialog Balloon] dialog will be diplayed.

Balloon ha been created.

1 Click the [Generate Dialog Balloon] button.

3 Configure etting


5 In the [Propertie] palette [Text] tab → Return to the [Balloon etting] tab,

configure the line thickne, color and tail, etc.

For detail on adding a tail, refer to『Adding a tail to a ruler balloon』( ⇒ P.352)

1 4

3

6

5

2

2

2 When you drag the [size change guide] you can move, zoom in or out on

balloon or text.




User Guide

349

C h a p t e r 1

11


Balloon i complete and the [Text layer] ha been changed into a [Balloon layer]. [How to read the Create balloon] dialog (EX only)

Will be diplayed when you click the [Create balloon] tab from the [Balloon

etting] tab found in the [Propertie] palette → [Text]

・[Basic shape]

select the baic hape of the balloon to be created from [Ellipe], [Rectangle] &

[R rectangle].

・[R intensity]

R rectangle angle curve etting.

・[Arrange pattern]

select the arranged pattern for the balloon to be created f rom [None], [Rough],

[Punctured (weak)], [Punctured (trong)], [Expanded] & [Focu line].

・[Arrange intensity]

set the intenity of the arrange pattern.

・[Instability of Intensity]

set the fluctuation of intenity of the arrange pattern.

・[Fineness Of Intensity]

set the detail of the arrange pattern.

・[Instability Of Fineness]

set the fluctuation in detail of the arrange pattern.

・[Convert To Line]

Make the balloon hape into traight line.

・ [Change In Instability]

Change the arrange pattern randomly.



Manga Studio

350

Add a tail to a ruler balloon

Add a [Tail] extending to a character on a ruler balloon.

3 From the inide of the balloon line drag the curor to the outide to et the tail

tart point and length.

4 Move the moue curor and once you have adjuted the tail curve and click,

the tail will be added.



Double click the [Balloon layer] in the [Layer] palette.

2. Create a tail

The [Propertie] palette will be diplayed.

5

2

1

4

3. Adding of the tail is complete

A tail ha been added to the balloon.

1 Click the [Dialog Balloon setting] tab.

2 Click the [Add Curve Tail] button.


balloon

Ruler

balloon

Add tail × ○



User Guide

351

C h a p t e r 1

11


Balloon settings

select the [Balloon layer] or [Text] layer and when you elect the [Propertie]

palette [Text] tab → [Dialog Balloon setting] tab, you can configure the balloon.

A

[Hand]Adjut the diplay poition of the balloon material.

B [Add Curve Tail]

Add a tail with a curved line to the balloon.

C [Add Linear Tail]

Add a tail with a traight line to the balloon.

D [Delete Selected Tail, Tail Joint]

Delete the tail or tail joint from the balloon.

E [Show/Hide Character Size Change Guide]

switch between diplaying or not diplaying the text ize change guide.

F [Show/Hide Dialog Balloon Size Change Guide]

switch between diplaying or not diplaying the balloon ize change guide.

・[Generate Dialog Balloon](EX only)

Create balloon material.

・[Select Dialog Balloon From Materials]

select a balloon material from the [Material] palette material.

・[Line width]

set the balloon material line width. (Only valid for [Ruler layer])

・[Tail width]

set the balloon image tail width. (Only valid for [Ruler layer])

・[Color Of Dialog Balloon Lines]

set the balloon line color.

A B E FC

・[Color Inside Dialog Balloon]

set the color inide the balloon image.

・[Use Tones]

Pate a tone inide the balloon.

・[Settings] button

The [simple tone etting] dialog will be diplayed and tone can be configured.

For detail on the [simple tone etting] dialog, refer to『Tone baic』( ⇒ P.201).

・[Match Text] (EX only)

Adjut the ize of the balloon to the text.

・[Save This Dialog Balloon In Materials]

save the balloon currently being configured to the [Material] palette.

・[View Page Image]

View the page image.

・[View Input Field]

View an [Input field] (for inputting text) for pecial character, ymbol, etcwhich are difficult to input from a keyboard.

D



Displays and Windows

Chapter 12

This chapter introduces changes in screen displays.

Step: 01 screen Diplay 356

Step: 02 show Guideline 363

C h a p t e r

12

D i s p l a y

s a n d Wi n d o w s

Step: 03 show Information 365



User Guide

355

C h a p t e r

12

D i s p l a y


Rotate ToolUe the [Rotate] tool to rotate the creen diplay.

2. Select the tool

Right-click the [Hand] tool from the [Tool] palette, and elect the [Rotate] tool.

1. Open the Page


3. Rotate

Drag the image to rotate the creen diplay.

select [Tool Option] from the [Window] menu to diplay [Hand Tool Option] or

the [Rotate Tool Option] palette.

Viewing Tool Options (Hand / Rotate)

A [Show All]

Diplay the image at full creen.

B [Actual Pixels]

Diplay the image in a ize where image pixel appear in a 1-to-1 ratio with

creen pixel.

C [Print Size]

Diplay the image in print ize.

D [Scale]

You can enter a cale at which to view the image.

E [Angle]

You can enter an angle from which to view the image.

Operation Method

Drag over the creen to ue.A B C

The following keyboard hortcut are alo available.

・Rotate the creen、[space] Key + [shift] Key + Drag

Application

D

E



Manga Studio

356

Bug Glasses ToolUe the [Bug Glae] tool to zoom the screen diplay.

1. Open the Page


2. Select the Tool

select the [Bug Glae] tool from the [Tool] palette.

3. Zoom the Image

Click the image to zoom in.

select [Tool Option] from the [Window] menu to diplay [Zoom Tool Option].

Viewing Tool Options

A [Show All]

Diplay the image at full creen.

B [Actual Pixels]

Diplay the image in a ize where image pixel appear in a 1-to-1 ratio with

creen pixel.

C [Print Size]

Diplay the image in print ize.

D [Zoom In]

Click the [Bug Glae] tool to zoom the image.

E [Zoom Out]

Click the [Bug Glae] tool to zoom out from the image.

・[Scale]

You can enter a cale at which to view the image.

・[Angle]

You can enter an angle from which to view the image.

・Drag the [Bug Glae] tool to expand the parameter.

・ [Hold the [Alt] key while clicking the [Bug Glae] tool to zoom out from the image.

・ You can alo Zoom the Image by electing the [Zoom In] / [Zoom Out]

command from the [Window] menu.

The following keyboard hortcut are alo available.

・ Zoom In [Ctrl] Key ＋ [Num +]

[space] Key + [Ctrl] Key + Click or Drag

・ Zoom Out [Ctrl] Key ＋ [Num -]

[space] Key＋ [Ctrl] Key＋ [Alt] Key＋ Click

Application

Operation Method

Click on the creen or drag over the creen to ue.A B C D E

F

G



User Guide

357

C h a p t e r

12

D i s p l a y


Screen RotationRotate the creen 90, 180, or 270 degree. Thi example ue the [Rotate 90

Degree] operation.

1. Open the Page



select [Rotate / Flip] from the [View] menu -> select [Rotate 90 Degree]

3. Display adjustment is complete.

The creen diplay ha rotated 90 degree.

Screen InversionInvert the image either vertically or horizontally. Thi example ue the [Flip

Horizontally] operation.

1. Open the Page



select [Rotate / Flip] from the [View] menu -> select [Flip Horizontally]


The image ha flipped horizontally.



Manga Studio

358

Actual PixelsDiplay the image in a ize where image pixel appear in a 1-to-1 ratio with

creen pixel.

1. Open the Page



select the [Actual Pixel] command from the [Window] menu.


The image i diplayed o that image pixel appear in a 1-to-1 ratio with creen pixel.

Show AllDiplay the image on a cale that fill the creen completely.

1. Open the Page



select the [Full screen Mode] command from the [Window] menu.


The entire image i diplayed.



User Guide

359

C h a p t e r

12

D i s p l a y


Print SizeDiplay the image in print ize.

1. Open the Page




The image i diplayed in print ize.

select the [Print size] command from the [Window] menu.

Show Transparent Areashow tranparent area of the image in a checkered pattern.

1. Open the Page



select [show Tranparent Area] from the [View] menu, and place a checkmark in

the menu.


Tranparent area of the image are diplayed in a checkered pattern.

For detail on Configuring [Print size] ee [Page: Zoom /Angle] (P. 13) in

"Preference."

Application

For detail on configuring [show Tranparent Area] ee [Page] (P. 11) in "Preference."

Application



Manga Studio

360

New WindowDiplay the ame document in multiple window. Thi i ueful when you want to

zoom one part of an image and view the entire image at the ame time.

1. Open the Page



select the [New Window] command from the [Window] menu.

3. Display adjustment is complete

Two window are diplayed.

The data i the ame, o changing one page will alo change the other page. You

can alo change the diplay method for individual page.



User Guide

361

C h a p t e r

12

D i s p l a y


Manga Studio

Show Guidelines02

You can toggle the displays of items like rulers, grids, and guides on and off.

Show Print Guide and Basic FrameToggle the diplay of the print guide and baic frame on and off.

1. Open the Page



select [Drawing Aid] -> [Print Guide / Baic Frame] from the [View] menu, and

place a checkmark in the menu.


The print guide / baic frame i no longer diplayed.

Show Measurement ScaleToggle the diplay of the on-creen meaurement cale on and off.

1. Open the Page



select [show Meaurement scale] from the [View] menu, and place a checkmark

in the menu.


The meaurement cale i diplayed on-creen.

To change print guide / baic frame etting, double click the [Print Guide and Baic

Frame] icon, then open the [Print Guide and Baic Frame] tab in the [Propertie]

Palette.

Application



Manga Studio

362

Show GuideCreate grid line on-creen, and toggle their diplay on and off.

1. Open the Page



The guide line are created when you click the meaurement cale.

When no [Guide Layer] i preent a new layer i created.

You can drag the guide line to move them.

2. Show the Measurement Scale

select [show Meaurement scale] from the [View] menu, and place a checkmark

in the menu to diplay the meaurement cale.

Show GridToggle the diplay of the on-creen meaurement grid on and off.

1. Open the Page



select [Drawing Aid] from the [View] menu, elect [show Grid], and place

a checkmark in the menu.


The grid i diplayed on-creen.

To change the [Grid Line] configuration method, double click the [Grid Layer] icon,

then open the [Grid] tab in the [Propertie] palette.

Application

3. Select a Tool

select the [Object selector] tool from the [Tool] palette.

To change the diplay of all guideline created, elect [Drawing Aid] from the

[View] menu, then elect the {show Guide}.

To remove individual guideline, ue the "Object selector" tool, to drag the ruler.

Explanation



User Guide

363

C h a p t e r

12

D i s p l a y


Manga Studio

Show Information03

You can change settings for story information, author information, and pagination.

Show Story and Author InfoToggle diplay of the tory and author information on and off. select [show story

and Author Info] from the [Diplay] menu and place a checkmark in the menu to

diplay thi information.

Show Page NumberToggle the diplay of the on-creen page number on and off. select [show Page

Number] from the [Diplay] menu and place a checkmark in the menu to diplaythi information.

Display PaginationToggle diplay of pagination on and off. select [show Pagination] from the

[Diplay] menu and place a checkmark in the menu to diplay thi information.

To Change story settingrmation / author information / page number / pagination

etting,

open the [story] tab from the [Edit] window, cloe the [Page] tab,

elect [Change story setting] from the [story] menu, and change the information

in the [story Info] dialog.

Application



Other

Chapter 13

In this chapter we will discuss how to use Materials, how to undo incorrect commands and actions to record work.

Step: 01 Material (For EX only) 374

Step: 02 Undoing command 378

O t h e r

Step: 02 Action (EX only) 380

C h a p t e r

13



Manga Studio

366

Manga Studio

Materials (For EX only)01

Manage rulers, balloons; character Materials, etc using the [Materials] palette.

Materials basicsHere we will introduce Material type and operation method.

For aving [Material] refer to『saving Material』( ⇒ P. 58).

・[Baic frame layer], [Guide layer], [Grid layer] and [sketch layer] cannot be aved

to the [Material] palette.

・It i poible to ave data created in another application. When you double click

on the aved data, the application ued to create it will tartup.

Explanation

Operation method: Using MaterialsDrag and drop Material from the [Material] palette& onto the page.

1. Open the Page


2. Drag &drop

From the [Window] menu, elect [Material], and drag & drop from the

[Material] palette [Material] → [Uer] folder onto the page.

3. Complete use

The new layer ha been created and the Material have been pated onto the page.

・ When you drag& drop an importable image file onto the page, the import

function or 2DLT function (EX only) will automatically tartup.

・ For non-importable file, the aociated application will tartup after double

clicking.

Explanation

Concept

Frequently ued Material in comic production can be called up anytime if aved to

the [Material] palette.

The Material which can be managed in the [Material] palette are a follow:

The location where you can ave Material in the [Material] palette are a follow:

・[Material] → [Uer] folder

PageFrame plit

Layer

Balloon ruler Material

Ruler Material

Character Material

3D Material

Image



User Guide

367

C h a p t e r

13

O t h e r

Operation method: Search Materials

You can earch Material aved in the [Material] palette.

1. Open the palette

select [Material] from the [Window] menu to diplay the [Material] palette.

3. Select the commandWhen you elect [search] from the [Material] palette [show Menu] the

[search] dialog will be diplayed.

1 set the [Name] etc earch condition. Here we will enter「Takigawa-an」.


2. Select folder

select the folder to be earched.

4. Search is complete

search ha completed. Item will be diplayed in the earch reult folder.

1

2

External browsing

select a nominated folder, uch a My Document, etc, diplay in the [Material]

pallete and pate the image on to the page. You can diplay data which wa

created in another application.

[select Material] palette → [Menu diplay] → [Browe external folder...] to import.



Manga Studio

368

Here we will introduce the concept operation method of character Material.

For aving character Material refer to『saving Material』( ⇒ P. 58).

Concept

Material where it i poible to ave layer and tone a a folder in character unit.

[Character Material]

[Tone Material]

Operation method: Using character Materials

From the aved [Character Material], pate Material a required onto the page.

1. Open the Page


From the [Window] menu, elect [Material] and the [Material] palette will bediplayed.

1 From [Material] → [Uer] → [Character Material], elect [HangryPopGirl] →

[Takigawa an] and double click.

1

2 With [Pate Thi Material], the entire character Material will be pated onto

the page.

3 With [Pate layer], a dialog will be diplayed and the elected layer will be

pated to the page.

4 With [Pate tone], a dialog will be diplayed and the elected tone Material

will be pated to the page.

[The [Propertie] dialog will be diplayed.

2

3

4

Character basics (EX only)



User Guide

369

C h a p t e r

13

O t h e r

2. Paste is complete

The Material ha been pated to the page.

[Pate Thi Material]

[Pate layer]

[Pate tone]

[Pate tone] ignore the area when you aved it and pate the tone a i, before

proceing, onto the page.

Note



Manga Studio

370

Manga Studio

Undoing commands02

A function to allow you to undo wrong commands and redo deleted commands.

Undoing commands (Undo)Undo a command.


select [Undo] through the [Edit] menu.

You can et up to 50 command which can be undone. Go to [File] menu

[Preference] → [Page] → [Undo] [No. of undo']

Application

1. Wrong command

During work, an extra line wa drawn.

3. Undo will occurThe command will be undone and the extra line will be deleted.

Redo command (Redo)Redo a deleted command to return to original condition.


select [Redo] through the [Edit] menu.

1. Redo the delete

Thi i a page where an extra line wa deleted during work.

3. Redo will occurRedo will occur, the extra line will be retored.



User Guide

371

C h a p t e r

13

O t h e r

History functionUing the hitory function, you can return to a previouly performed operation.


select [Hitory] from the [Window] menu to diplay the [Hitory] palette.

2. Undo

Undo procee to the point of the elected command.

1

1 select the proce to be undone from the command diplayed in the [Hitory pallete].



Manga Studio

372

Manga Studio

Actions (EX only)03

A function where you record a series of commands, then by replaying them, repeat the same process on multiple images.

Actions basicsHere we will introduce the action function concept and operation method.

Concept

Action i a function which allow you to record a erie of operation to your

computer and allow you to work more efficiently.

The action function ha the following baic concept.

・[Actions set]

Ued to claify action, create from「Action」.

・[Action]

The mallet unit of action which can be recorded. Created from [Command].

「Record」will occur in the action unit.

By clicking「Add」an「Action」(item) will be created in the「Action et」

and the「Command」will be aved in「Record」「Action」(item).

・[Command]

Refer to the recorded「Command」.

Written text will remain a i.

From the recorded command, elect [White Outline on Black 0.5mm].

A white outline will appear on written text.



User Guide

373

C h a p t e r

13

O t h e r

Operation method 1: Record actions

Create an action et and record action.

1. Open the palette

select [Action] from the [Window] menu to diplay the [Action] palette.

2. Select the menu command

select [New set] from the [Action] palette [Menu diplay].

3. Create action set

An action et will be created in the [Action] palette.

4. Record actions

Perform the action you want to record then record in an [Action et].

Perform the action you want to record.

Click the [stop recording action] button.

6. Action recording is complete

The operation have been recorded in the [Action] palette.

To delete an action, elect the command of the action you want to delete, and then

from the [Action] palette [Menu diplay] elect [Delete action].

Application

1 When the dialog [New set] i diplayed, et the [setting Name] and hortcut.


1

2

2

1 The newly created [New action et] will be diplayed.

2 Click the [Add action] button.

1

1 The newly created [Action 1] will be diplayed.

2 Click the [start recording action] button.

1

2



User Guide

375

C h a p t e r

13

O t h e r

Note that depending on the command it may not be poible to record the et value

for ome menu command.

Note

Commands which cannot be recorded

The following command cannot be recorded in the action function.

[File] → [Mot Recently Ued File]

[File] → [Import] → [select TWAIN device]

[File] → [Import] → [Continuou scan]

[File] → [Page etting]

[File] → [Print etting]

[File] → [Preference]

[File] → [shortcut etting]

[File] → [Cutom tool etting]

[File] → [Intall Material]

[File] → [Quit]

[Edit] → [Undo]

[Edit] → [Redo]

All from [View], [Window] and [Help] menu

When you elect [Action etting] from the [Action] palette → [Menu diplay],

the [Action etting] dialog will be diplayed.

・[Waiting time]

set the time to wait before executing a command.

・[Carry Out Continuous Check Of Loop Play]

When loop playback i et, every t ime the action playback ha completed

a continuation confirmation dialog will be diplayed.

[How to read the Action settings] dialog

Operation method 4: Insert menu

save a menu bar command directly to an action et.

select [Inert menu] from the [Action] palette → [Menu diplay] to inert.

1. Select the action

In the [Action] palette, elect the [Action] that you want to ave into the[Action et] palette.

4. Insert menu is complete

A new [Command] ha been aved to the [Action] palette.

2. Select the menu command

When you elect [Inert menu] from the [Action] palette [Menu diplay], the

[Inert menu] dialog will be diplayed.

3. Select target menu

select the menu command you want to ave from the menu bar. select the

[New Layer].

The [New layer] will be aved to the [Inert menu] dialog.

Click [OK] when aving i complete.



Features Reference

Chapter 14

This chapter is a reference for Manga Studio's menus, toolbars and windows, and contains a list of keyboard shortcut commands.

Step: 01 Menu 386

Step: 02 Window & Palette 398

C h a p t e r

14

F e a t u r e s R e f e r e n c e



Manga Studio

378

Manga Studio

Menus01

This chapter explains all the features available in Manga Studio's menus.

Thi menu i motly ued for file input and output operation.

・[Revert...]

Revert the content of the current file to the mot

recently aved tate.

・[Save As Template...]

save the Page setting of the current [Page] File a

a Page Template.

・[Save Material] (EX only)

save the currently elected [Page], [Page] Layout, or

layer content on the [Material] Palette.

・[Import]

→ [3D File...] (EX only)

Import 3D File into a [Page].

→ [Image File...]

Import an image file into a [Page] a a layer.

→ [2DLT...] (EX only)

Import an image file into a [Page] and perform

2DLT rendering.

→ [Photoshop File...]

(EX only)

Import a Photohop File into a [Page] a a layer.

・[New]

Create a new [story] File or [Page] File for editing.

・[Open...]

Open a previouly aved [story] File or [Page] File

for editing.

・[Most Recently Used Files]

show a lit of recently ued [story] File and [Page]

File. select a file to begin editing.

・[Close]

Cloe the currently open editing window.

・[Save]

save the content of the [Page] File you're editing

to dik.

・[Save All]

save the content of all opened [Page] File to dik.

・[Save As...]

save the content of the [Page] File you're editing

to dik with a new name.

・[Save Story As...]

save the content of the [story] File you're editing

to dik with a new name.

File Menu

→ [TWAIN...]

Import an image from a TWAIN device into a [Page]

a a layer.

→ [Continuous Scan...] (EX only)

scan multiple page into a [story].

→ [Select TWAIN Device...]

select a TWAIN device to ue.

→ [Page File...]

Import a page file into the current [story].

→ [Layer File...]

Import a layer file into the current [Page].

→ [Multiple Layer Files...]

Import all layer file contained in the folder you

chooe into the current [Page].

→ [Text File...] (EX only)

Import a text file into the current [Page] a a new

text layer.

・[Export]

→ [Image File (In Pixels)...]

Export a [Page] into one of a number of image file

format by chooing a pixel ize.

→ [Image File (Dimensions)...]

Export a [Page] into one of a number of image file

format by chooing it Dimenion.

→ [Export Print Shop Data...]

Export a [story] in a data format uitable for

ending to a print hop.

→ [Text File...] (EX only)

Export the text from all a [Page]' text layer into a

text file.

・[Page Settings...]

set the Page size, orientation, etc. for printing.

・[Print Settings...]

set the print range, number of copie, and other

option.

・[Print...]

Print the current [story] or [Page] according to the

print etting.

1 1

2 2

3

3

4

5

4

5



User Guide

379

C h a p t e r

14


Ue thi to intall a material pack. Exit Manga studio.

・[Quit]

Exit Manga studio.

・[Preferences...]

Chooe tory and page behavior, printing and

tablet etting, and other preference.

・[Shortcut Settings...]

(EX only)

Edit hortcut etting.

・[Custom Tool Settings...]

(EX only)

Edit etting for the [Cutom Tool] Palette.

・[Install Material...]

Thi menu i mainly ued for image editing operation.

・[Paste White As Transparent]

Editing[Page]Pate the content aved to the

clipboard to the new (page), making the white

area tranparent.

・[Paste Colors As Opaque]

Editing[Page]Pate the content aved to the

clipboard to the new (page), making the color

denity opaque.

・[Clear]

Delete the content included in the elected area of

the elected layer.

・[Clear Outside Selection]

Delete the content included in the area that ha not

been elected of the elected layer.

・[Fill Selection...]Paint the pecified color and etting within the

elected area.

・[Undo Fill]

[Page]Delete operation immediately prior to thi

(page).

・[Redo][Page]Redo the operation that deleted the (page).

・[Cut]

Cut the elected area, and ave to the clipboard.

・[Copy]

Copy the elected area, and ave to the clipboard.

・[Copying to Another Application]

Copy the elected area, and ave to the clipboard

to be pated to another application.

・[Paste]Editing [Page] Pate the content aved to the

clipboard to the new (page) a a new layer.

Edit Menu

・ [Fill Selection With Foreground Color](EX only)

Paint the currently-elected drawing color on the

target layer within the elected area.

・[Outline Selection]

(EX only)

specifie and draw the color and thickne of

the olid line around the elected area.

・[Change Line Color to Drawing Color]

(EX only)

Change the color of the drawing line on

the vector layer and the part that are nottranparent within the elected area to the

currently-elected drawing color.

・[Move and Transform]

→ [Scale…]・[Rotate…]・[Free

Transform…]・[Distort…]・[Perspective…]

・[Flip Horizontal]・[Flip Vertical]

Grap and drag the handle to tranform the

image in the elected area.

→ [Mesh Transform…](EX only)

Divide the image uing a grille to enable each

part to be tranformed eparately.

・[Tone Distort](EX only)

→ [Peripheral Distort…]・[Clear]・[Blur

Distort…]・[Scale…]・[Rotate…]・[Free

Transform…]・[Distort…]・[Perspective…]

・ [Flip Horizontal]・[Flip Vertical]・[Mesh

Transform…]

Ditort and tranform tone within the elected

area. Grap and drag the handle to ditort the

image a neceary.

・[Save Pattern To Tone Material]

save image within the elected area to the

[Material] palette a pattern tone.

・[Save Pattern To Dialog Balloon Material]

1

1

2

2



Manga Studio

380

Thi menu contain action for the [story] Tab of the [Edit] Window.

・[Insert New Page]

Inert a new page after the page elected in the

[Page Lit].

・[Select Paper and Insert...]

select the [Page Form], number of page, and

whether to inert the page before or after the

page elected in the [Page Lit].

・[Spread Pages] (EX only)

Concatenate adjacent page elected on the [Page

Lit] to make a page pread.

・[Single Pages] (EX only)

Detach concatenated page elected on the [Page

Lit] to make ingle page.

・[View]

→ [Page List]

Toggle to how or hide the [Page Lit].

→ [Fit View Scale to View Width]

Automatically cale the [Page Lit] to fit the view

width.

・[Open Page]

Open the elected page from the [Page Lit] in the

[Page Edit Area] of the current [Edit] Window.

・[Open Page in New Window]

Open the elected page from the [Page Lit] in a

new [Edit] Window.

・[Close Page]

Cloe the current page.

・[Next Page]

Go to the next page.

・[Previous Page]

Go to the previou page.

・[Clear Page]

Clear the content from the page elected in the

[Page Lit] and reet it to it initial tate.

・[Delete Page]

Delete the page elected in the [Page Lit] from the

tory.

Story Menu

→ [Page Info]

Toggle to how or hide the [Page Info] in the [Edit]

Window.

→ [Print Guide/Basic Frame]

Toggle to how or hide the [Print Guide & Baic

Frame] in the [Page Lit].

→ [Quick View]

set the tory view tate in the [Page Lit] to Quick View.

→ [High Quality View]

set the number of page in the tory, and check the

cover page and pagination in the [Page Lit].

・[Change Story Settings...]

Change story setting in the [story] File, uch a

the Title and author’ name.

・[Binding Position/ Start Page Changing]Change the binding poition and tart page

poition of your [story].

・[Change Page Format Guide (All Pages)...]

Change the paper guide etting for all page in

your [story].

・ [Change Page Format Guide (Selective

Page)...]

Change the paper guide etting for the elected

[Page].

・[Edit Memo...]Add a memo for the elected [Page].

・[Story Editor...] (EX only)

Open the [story Editor] to edit all the text ued in

your [story].

1 1

(EX only)

save image within the elected area or elected

ruler to the [Material] palette a word balloon.

・[Save Pattern To Character Material]

(EX only)

save image within the elected area to

[Material] a character.

・[Save Pattern To Brush Material…]

(EX only)

save the image within the elected area a

pattern bruhe.

[Join Print Guides] (EX only)

Matche left and right print guide on the pread page.



User Guide

381

C h a p t e r

14


Thi menu i ued for adjuting the page diplay and other etting.

View Menu

・[Rotate/Invert]

→ [Normal View], [Rotate 90 Degrees],

[Rotate 180 Degrees], [Rotate 270 Degrees],

[Flip Horizontal], [Flip Vertical]

Rotate or flip the view of the page image.

・[Vector View] (EX only)

→ [Show Anti-aliasing]

smooth out line in a [Vector Layer] with anti-

aliaing.

→ [Show Center Line]

show thin line along the center of line in a

[Vector Layer].

・[Show Page Rulers]

Toggle to how or hide the meaurement cale.

・[Show Panel Folder Area]

Toggle to how or hide [Frame] area gridline.

・[Show Text Layer Area]

Toggle to how or hide [Text Layer] area gridline.

・[Show 3D Workspace Area] (EX only)

Toggle to how or hide [3D Workpace] area gridline.

・[Show Story/Author Info]

Toggle to how or hide the story Info and Author Info.

・[Show Page Number]

Toggle to how or hide page number.

・[Show Pagination]

Toggle to how or hide pagination.

・[Show Transparent Area]

Toggle to how or hide tranparent area in the image.


Toggle to how or hide the page image in the panel

area of the [Panel] Window.

・[Show Entire Page Image in Panel Window]

Toggle to how or hide the entire page image in

the [Panel] Window.

・[Drawing Aids]

→ [Print Guide/Basic Frame]

Toggle to how or hide the Print Guide and baic

frame.

→ [Show Guide]

Toggle to how or hide guide line.

→ [Show Grid]

Toggle to how or hide the grid.

・[Snap]

Toggle napping.

・[Set Snap Point]

→ [Rulers], [Perspective] (EX only), [Speed

Lines] (EX only), [Parallel Lines] (EX only),

[Concentric Circle] (EX only), [Radial Curves]

(EX only), [Symmetry Ruler] (E X only),

[Guides], [Grids]

set what kind of ruler, grid or guide to nap to.

・[Show Page Rulers Manipulator]

Toggle to how or hide the ruler manipulator.

・[Show Page Rulers Handles]

Toggle to how or hide ruler handle.

・[Show Selection Launcher]

Toggle to how or hide the election launcher.

・[Show Selection] (EX only)

Toggle to how or hide the dotted line around

election.

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4



Manga Studio

382

・[Use Quick Select] (EX only)

Toggle the ue of [Quick select]. During [Quick

select], the selection Layer of the diplay tatu i

automatically treated a the selection.

・[Convert Selection To Panel Folder]

(EX only)

Convert the election to a [Panel Ruler Layer].

・[Vector Selection Method] (EX only)

→ [Cut In Selection]

When handling the drawing line for the [Vector

Layer], the drawing line are cut at the election

and then elected...

→ [Select Enclosed and Touching Lines]

When taking a election of the drawing line of the

[Vector Layer], the drawing line that are encloed

in or touch the election are elected.

→ [Select Enclosed Lines Only]

When taking a election of the drawing line

of the [Vector Layer], the drawing line that are

completely encloed in the election are elected.

Thi menu i ued for operation on election area and elected data.

Selection Menu

specifie a color on [Page], and the portion with

the ame color are elected.

・[Convert Selection To Layer]

Convert the current election to a [selection

Layer].

・[Change Layer Type To Selection]

Convert the [selection Layer] to the election.

・[Add Layer To Selection]

Convert the [selection Layer] to a elected area

and add it to the current election.

・[Subtract Layer From Selection]

Convert the [selection Layer] to a elected area

and delete it from the current election.

・[Use Quick Mask](EX only)

Toggle the ue of [Quick Mak]. During [Quick

Mak], the election can be temporarily created a

if drawn by uing the Drawing Tool.

・[Select All]

select the entire page during [Page] edit, and

elect the entire panel during [Panel] window edit.

・[Clear Selection]

Clear the current election.

・[Reselect](EX only)

Retore the cleared election to it tatu before

being cleared.

・[Invert Selection]

Invert elected and unelected region.

・[Expand Selection...]

specifie the numerical value and method to

expand the election.

・[Reduce Selection...]

specifie the numerical value and method to reduce

the election.

・[Blur Border...](EX only)

Blur the border of the election.

・[Select Color Range(Z)...]

1

1



User Guide

383

C h a p t e r

14


Perform layer operation.

・[New Layer…]

set the layer type and detail, and create a new

layer.

・[Duplicate Layer]

Duplicate the elected layer.

・[Delete Layer]

Delete the elected layer.

・[Group Layer Into Folder]

Create layer folder, and ave the elected layer

in the folder.

・[Ungroup Layers]

Remove the layer tored in the elected [Layer

folder], [Text folder], and [Panel Folder], and delete

the folder.・・

・[Open Panel Folder]

Open the elected [Panel Folder] in a eparate

window.

・[Show Panel]

Diplay the panel frame of the elected [Panel

Folder].

・[Hide Panel]

Hide the panel frame of the elected [Panel

Folder].

・[Change Layer Type]

Change the type of the elected layer. Enable

Panel Folder to be created to Frame ruler.

・[Rasterize Layer]

Convert the elected layer into a rater layer.

・[Merge Layers…]

Merge multiple elected layer into a ingle layer.

・[Merge With Lower Layers]

Merge the elected layer and one layer down into

a ingle layer.

・[Make Upper Layer Edit Target]

(EX only)

Change the layer to be edited to one layer above.

・[Make Lower Layer Edit Target]

(EX only)

Change the layer to be edited to one layer below.

Layers Menu

・[Show Layer Color]

Change whether or not to replace and diplay the

image in the elected layer with the replacement

color et uing the [Propertie] palette. []

・[Lock Layer]

Turn ON and OFF whether or not to temporarily

diable change for the majority of propertie in the

elected layer.

・[Layer Properties]

Diplay the [Propertie] palette and the layer tab

for the elected layer.

・[Layer Settings]

Diplay the [Propertie] palette for the elected

layer, and diplay the pecial etting tab for that

layer.

・[Tone Display Settingss]

→ [Auto Set]

Change all tone diplay method to [Auto].

→ [Halftone Dot View]

Change all tone diplay method to [Tone].

→ [Grayscale View]

Change all tone diplay method to [Gray].

→ [Show Paste Area]

Add all color to the area to which the tone ha

been pated, and diplay.

→ [Hide Paste Area]

Hide if the area to which the tone ha been pated

i diplayed in color.

1

1



Manga Studio

384

Perform etting and operation related to Ruler.

・[Verticalize]

Make the ide of the ruler elected with the

[Ruler selection] tool vertical.

・[Horizontalize]

Make the ide of the ruler elected with the

[Ruler selection] tool horizontal.

・[Split Panel Ruler]

split the Panel ruler elected with the [Ruler

selection] tool into equal interval.

・[Expand Panel Ruler]

Expand and cut the Panel ruler elected with

the [Ruler selection] tool to the page edge in any

direction.

・[Merge Two Panel Rulers]

Merge the two elected Panel ruler.

・[Cut Rulers]

Cut the ruler elected with the [Ruler selection]

tool, and copie them to the clipboard.

・[Copy Rulers]

Copie the ruler elected with the [Ruler selection]

tool to the clipboard.

・[Paste Rulers]

Pate the ruler copied to the clipboard.

・[Delete Selected Points]

Delete the point of the ruler elected with the

[Ruler selection] tool.

・[Change Angle Status of Selected Points]

(EX only)

Change whether the tart and end point of path ruler

elected with the [Ruler selection] tool are corner.

Ruler Menu

・[New Special Ruler](EX only)

→ [New Pe r spec t i v e R u l e r ( 1 - p o i n t

Perspective)]・ [New Perspective Ruler

(2-point Perspective)]・ [New Perspective

Ruler (3-point Perspective)](EX only)

Create a perpective ruler in the layer being edited.

→ [New Radial Lines Ruler] (EX only)

Create a speed Line ruler in the layer being

edited.

→ [New Radial Curves Ruler]

(EX only)

Create a Radial curve ruler in the layer being

edited.

→ [New Parallel Lines Ruler] (EX only)

Create a parallel line ruler in the layer being edited.

→ [New Concentric Circle Ruler] (EX only)

Create a concentric Circle ruler in the layer being

edited.

・[New Symmetry Ruler](EX only)

→ [Line Symmetry]・ [2-axis Symmetry]・

[2-point Symmetry]・[3-point Symmetry]・



[12-point Symmetry]

Create a point-ymmetry ymmetry ruler in the

layer being edited.

1

2

2

1



User Guide

385

C h a p t e r

14


Thi menu i ued for adjuting and tranforming image.

Filter Menu

・[Render]

Thee filter ([Vanihing Point...], [Focu Line...],

[speed Line...], [Cloud Pattern] (EX only),

[Lightning...] (EX only)) are ued for generating

image.

・[Transform] (EX only)

Thee filter ([Polar Coordinate...], [Wave...],

[Waveform...] (EX only), [spiral...], [Zigzag...]) are

ued to tranform an image.

・[Image Adjustments] (EX only)

Thee filter ([Brightne/Contrat...], [Tone

Curve...], [Adjut Level...], [Hue/saturation/Value...],

[Bitmap...]) are ued to adjut an image.

・[Line Adjust] (EX only)

Thee filter ([Dut Cleaner...], [Edit Line...], [Change

Width]) are ued to adjut line in an image.

・[Effects] (EX only)

Thee filter ([Moaic...], [sharpen], [sharpen

(Heavy)], [Poterization...], [Invert Tone]) are ued

to add effect to an image.

・[Blur] (EX only)

Thee filter ([Blur], [Blur (Heavy)], [Gauian

Blur...], [Radial Blur...], [Motion Blur...]) are

ued to add effect to an image.

・[2DLT...] (EX only)

Thi filter i ued to perform 2DLT proceing

on an image.

・[Computones] (EX only)

Thee filter ([Tone...] are ued to pate

Computone material into an image.

・[Distort] (EX only)

Thee filter ([sparkle...], [soft Focu...],

[Pattern...], [Random Grid Pattern...], [Rain...])

are ued to generate image.

・[Drawing] (EX only)

Thee filter ([2D Rotate...], [Pinch...], [speed

Rotate...], [Ditorted Focu Line...], [Ditorted

speed Line...], [spherical...], [Fiheye Len...])

are ued to tranform your image.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9



Manga Studio

386

Perform operation related to window and palette.

・[History]

Toggle to how or hide the [Hitory] Palette.

・[Color]

Toggle to how or hide the [Color] Palette.

・[Custom Tools] (EX only)

Toggle to how or hide the [Cutom Tool] Palette.

・[Actions] (EX only)

Toggle to how or hide the [Action] Palette.

・[Cascade]

Arrange the [Edit] Window o they cacade.

・ [Horizontal]Arrange the [Edit] Window a horizontal tile.

・[Vertical]

Arrange the [Edit] Window a vertical tile.

・[New Window]

Open a new [Edit] Window like the one currently

being edited.

・[Full screen Mode] (EX only)

Enlarge to current [Edit] Window to fill the entire

creen.

・[Arrange Palette]

→ [Arrange]

Return all palette poition to a tate aved with

"save Current Poition."

→ [Initialize Position]

Reet all palette to their initial poition.

→ [Save Current Positions]

save the current poition of all palette.

・[Zoom In]

Enlarge the view of the current [Edit] Window.

・[Zoom Out]

shrink the view of the current [Edit] Window.

・[Actual Pixels]

Make each pixel of the current [Page] image equal

one pixel on your creen.

・[Fit To Window]

Reize the current [Page] to fit it content in the

current edit area.

・[Print Size]

Reize the current [Page] to match the print ize et

in your preference.

・[Show All Palettes]

Toggle to how or hide the current [Palette].

・[Beginner's Assistant]

Toggle to how or hide the [Beginner' Aitant].

・[Tool Bar]

Toggle to how or hide the [Tool Bar].

・[Status Bar]

Toggle to how or hide the [statu Bar].

・[Tools]

Toggle to how or hide the [Tool] Palette.

・[Tool Options]

Toggle to how or hide the [Tool Option] Palette.

・[Layers]

Toggle to how or hide the [Layer] Palette.

・[Navigator]

Toggle to how or hide the [Navigator] Palette.

・[Materials]Toggle to how or hide the [Material] Palette.

・[Properties]

Toggle to how or hide the [Propertie] Palette.

Window Menu

1 1



User Guide

387

C h a p t e r

14


Diplay the help and verion information.

・[Register Online....]

・[Check for Updates]

・[Documentation]

・[Manga Studio Product Page]

・[Manga Studio Online Resources]

Open Mangastudio.net in your brower.

・[Buy Manga Content]

・[Dynamic Help]

Diplay and hide Dynamic Help.

・[Version Information…]

Diplay the verion information.

Help Menu



Manga Studio

388

Edit Window

[Edit] Window [Story] Tab

Diplayed when the [story] tab in the [story] file i opened.

[Edit] Window [Page] Tab

Diplayed when the [Page] tab in the [story] file and [Page] file i opened.

Panel Window

Diplayed by double-clicking the panel folder in the [Page] file.

Diplayed when the [story] file and [Page] file are opened.



User Guide

389

C h a p t e r

14


[Edit] Window, [Story] Tab Toolbar

Thi toolbar i on the [story] Tab in the [Edit] Window.

A Zoom InB Zoom OutC

scaleD scroll (croll the [Page Lit] on the [story] Tab in the [Edit] Window)E selectF show InfoG show Menu

A B C D E GF

[Edit] Window, [Page] Tab Toolbar

Thi toolbar i on the [Page] Tab in the [Edit] Window.

A Zoom InB Zoom OutC scaleD Fit To WindowE Actual PixelF Print size

G Rotate by specified AngelH AngleI Retore ViewJ Flip Horizontal

K Flip VerticalL show Page RulerM show Tranparent AreaN show Page Ruler ManipulatorO show Page Ruler HandleP show selection Launcher

Q show Page Image in Panel WindowR show Entire Page Image in Panel WindowS Change Page Image OpacityT snap

U snap to RulerV snap to Perpective RulerW snap to Radial Line RulerX snap to Radial Curve RulerY snap to Parallel Line RulerZ snap to Concentric Circle Ruler

a snap to symmetry Rulerb snap to Guidec snap to Gridd show Menu

A B C D E F G H I KJ L M N PO

Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d

select [Tool Bar] from the [Window] menu to diplay or hide the tool bar.

Tool Bar

Main Window Tool Bar

Thi i the tool bar for the main window, which i diplayed when "Manga studio" i tarted.

A B C D E F G H I KJ L

M N O P Q R S T U V

A New Create/PageB New story/storyC OpenD saveE save AllF CutG CopyH Pate

I ClearJ UndoK RedoL PrintM Tool (Diplay Palette)N Tool Option (Diplay Palette)O Layer (Diplay Palette)P Navigator (Diplay Palette)

Q Material (Diplay Palette)R Propertie (Diplay Palette)S Hitory (Diplay Palette)T Color (Diplay Palette)U Cutom Tool (Diplay Palette)V Action (Diplay Palette)



Manga Studio

390

Diplay when [Tool] i elected in the [Window] menu.

The command are laid out a button.

Tools Palette

A [select Rectangle] ToolB [select Ellipe] ToolC [select Lao] ToolD [select Polyline] ToolE [Magic Marker Wand] ToolF [Object selector] ToolG [select Layer] ToolH [Eyedropper] Tool (EX only)I [Panel Ruler Cutter] ToolJ [Create Frame] ToolK [Move Layer] ToolL [3D Frame] Tool (EX only)M [stamp] Tool (EX only)

N [Pen] ToolO [Pencil] ToolP [Magic Marker] ToolQ [Eraer] Tool

R [Bruh Pen] Tool (EX only)S [Pattern Bruh] ToolT [Fill] ToolU [Cloe Fill] Tool (EX only)V [Gradation] Tool (EX only)W [Text] ToolX [Line] ToolY [Curve] ToolZ [Polyline] Toola [Create Path] Tool (EX only)b [Rectangle] Toolc [Ellipe] Toold [Polygon] Tool

e [Line Level] Tool (EX only)f [Ditort] Tool (EX only)g [Blur] Tool (EX only)h [Edit Line] Tool (EX only)

i [speed Line] Tool (EX only) j [Change Width] Tool (EX only)k [Dut Filter] Tool (EX only)l [Join Line] Tool

m [stamp] Tool (EX only)n [Color Blend] Tool (EX only)o [Dodge] Tool (EX only)p [Burn] Tool (EX only)q [Hand] Toolr [Rotate] Tools [Zoom] Toolt [Black Darkne]u [White Darkne]

v [Tranparent]w Drawing Color: Tone] (EX only)

e

f

A

B

a

Z

Y

X

k

j

l

r

q

I

J

Manga Studio

Windows Palette02

This section introduces the Manga Studio window and palette functions.

T

P

N

E

I

G

S

W

s

Q

O

F

K

t u v

J

(For Debut)

m

n

p

o

i

h

g

d

b

c

C

D

P

R

V

N

L

T

E

G

t

s

Q

S

W

O

M

U

F

K

H

u v

w

(For EX)



User Guide

391

C h a p t e r

14


Diplay when [Tool Option] i elected in the [Window] menu.

Enable the advanced [Tool] function to be et. You can toggle between [show Menu], [show Tab], [show Lit], and [show stroke]. The [show Lit] and [show stroke] tool

might not be diplayed.

Tools Options Palette

Enable the advanced [Tool] function to be et.

The item in the [Tool Option] palette depend on the tool. For detail, refer to the page for each tool.

[show Tab]

[show Lit]

[show stroke]



Manga Studio

392

H [New Image Layer] ButtonCreate a new [Image Layer].

I [New Selection Layer] ButtonCreate a new [selection Layer].

J [New Ruler Layer] Button

Create a new [Ruler Layer].

K [New Guide Layer] ButtonCreate a new [Guide Layer].

L [Show/Hide Layer]Click to toggle whether the layer i viible or

hidden. When the Eye icon appear, the layer'

image are viible.

M [Enable/Disable Layer Drawing]When the pen icon i viible, drawing i enabled in

the layer.

If you click on another layer of the ame typewhile one i already elected, a checkmark will

appear. You can manipulate the originally elected

layer and the clicked layer at the ame time in the

[Layer] Palette.

If another kind of layer i already elected, clicking

on the layer will elect it and how the pen icon.

N [Layer] IconsEach type of layer i repreented by a different icon.

Click the icon to elect and how the layer.

Double-click to open the [Propertie] Palette.

O [Layer Name] Field Click to elect and how the layer. The field will be

hown in a violet color when the layer i elected.

Double-click to change the name of the layer.

P [Convert Selection to Layer] ButtonConvert a election to a [selection Layer].

Q [Change Layer Type to Selection] ButtonImport a election area aved in a [selection Layer]

and create a new election.

R [Use/Cancel Quick Mask] Button

When enabled, you can change the election ina layer by editing it with drawing tool.

S [Use/Cancel Quick Select] ButtonWhen enabled, you can read a election on

multiple [selection Layer] at once.

T New Layer MenuClick the [Category] field on the [Layer] Palette to

how the New Layer Menu.

U Show Layer Properties Iconshow the [Propertie] Palette.

When the [Page] Tab of an [Edit] Window i open, elect [Layer] from the [Window] Menu to open the Layer Palette. You can manage the layer in your image.

Layers Palette

FDC GE

P R SQ

A B

L

O

N

H

M

J

K

I

A [Color View] ButtonWhen clicked on, the layer' [Diplay Color] i et

to [Color] Mode. The replacement color et in the

[Propertie] Palette for [Black] and [White] become

active.

B [Opacity]

Adjut the opacity for image in the currentlyelected layer.

C [New Layer] ButtonCreate a new [Image Layer].

D [New Layer Folder] ButtonCreate a new [Layer Folder].

E [Delete Layer] ButtonDelete the currently elected layer.

F [Lock/Unlock Layer] Button

Toggle whether the layer may be edited.

G [Show Menu] Buttonshow the [Layer] Menu.

T

U



User Guide

393

C h a p t e r

14


Diplay when [Navigator] i elected in the [Window] menu.

Diplay all or ome of the page a thumbnail. The page poition move when the page inide the palette i dragged.

Navigator Palette

E [Angle]Rotate and diplay the image at the pecified angle.

F [Information Display] ButtonDiplay the ize and poition information detail

numerically. H ～ O Diplay and hide the field.

G [Show Menu] ButtonDiplay the [Navigator] menu.

H [X] AxisDiplay the X axi of the curor whoe tarting

point i the top left of the image.

I [Y] Axis

Diplay the Y axi of the curor whoe tartingpoint i the top left of the image.

J [H]Diplay the length along the X axi of the elected area.

K [V]Diplay the length along the Y axi of the elected area.

L [L]Diplay the length of the line to the oppoing

corner within the elected area.

M [R] (Red)Diplay the R (red) of the curor poition

numerically.

N [G] (Green)Diplay the g (Green) of the curor poition

Numerically.

O [B] (Blue)Diplay the B (blue) of the curor poition

numerically.

P [To Left Page]Open the next page when a tory i open.

Q [To Right Page]Open the previou page when a tory i open.

BA

H

I

J

GF

LK

EC D

M

O

N

A [Zoom In] ButtonEnlarge the image.

B [Zoom Out] ButtonReduce the image.

To change the [Zoom In] and [Zoom Out]

cale, elect the [File] menu, and then elect

[Preference], [Page], [scale and Angle], and

[Diplay Magnification].

C [Scale]Diplay the image uing the pecified cale.

D [Rotate Specified Angle]

Rotate and diplay the image according to the etvalue whenever thi option i clicked.

To change the rotation angle, elect the [File]

menu, and then elect [Preference], [Page], [scale

and Angle], and [step Value].

P Q



Manga Studio

394

Diplay when [Material] i elected in the [Window] menu. Manage tone, word balloon, and ruler, etc.

Materials Palette

L [Show Menu] ButtonDiplay the [Material] menu.

M [Move Up] ButtonMove to the folder one level above.

N [Move Down] ButtonMove to the folder one level below.

O [Zoom In] ButtonEnlarge the preview diplay.

P [Zoom Out] ButtonReduce the preview diplay.

Q [Scale]

Change the ize of the preview diplay uing eitherthe lider or by entering a numerical value.

R [Folder Selection Menu]select the folder.

A FEB DC

NM

LKJIHG

QPO

A [Paste Materials] Button

Pate the material elected uing the [Material]palette to the elected area or [Page] tab in the

[Edit] window.

B [Replace Tone] ButtonReplace the elected tone in the elected area or

the [Page] tab in the [Edit] window with the tone

elected uing the [Tone] palette.

C [New Tone] Button[Diplay the [Propertie] palette and create a new

tone. You can create tone in the individual [Uer]

folder only in the [Material] palette.

D [New Folder] ButtonYou can create new folder. You can create

folder in the individual [Uer] folder only in the

[Material] palette.

E [Save Materials]You can save external file a material.

F [Delete]

You can delete the tone or folder. You can createfolder in the individual [Uer] folder only in the

[Material] palette.

G [Change Settings…]Diplay the [Propertie] palette, o you can change

the material etting.

H [Add to Favorites]Add the elected material to Favorite.

I Pull-Down MenuYou can elect to diplay the material table a

[small], [Large], [Detail], and [Lit].

J [Switch Tree View]Diplay and hide the t ree diplay.

K [Switch Preview]Diplay and hide the Preview diplay.

R



User Guide

395

C h a p t e r

14


select [Hitory] on the [Window] Menu to open the Hitory Palette. Thi record and manage the action hitory.

History Palette

A [Undo] ButtonRevert to a tate before the lat action.

B [Redo] ButtonRevert to a tate before the lat Undo action.

C [Show Menu] ButtonUe thi to elect [Undo] and [Redo] operation

from the [Hitory] Palette.

D [Action History]show the action hitory. Recent action are hown

at the bottom.

BA C

D

select [Propertie] on the [Window] Menu to open the Propertie Palette.

Properties Palette

A [Layer Type]show the layer type.

B [Layer Name]You can change the name of the layer here.

C [Color Model]show the currently et color model.

D [Resolution]show the currently et reolution.

E [Opacity]Adjut the layer' opacity.

F [Display Color]

Toggle the layer' diplay mode between[Graycale] and [Color].

G [Alternate Color of Black]When [Diplay Color] i et to [Color], thi et the

[Black] replacement color.

H [Alternate Color of White]When [Diplay Color] i et to [Color], thi et the

[White] replacement color.

I [Palette Color]You can et the layer diplay color on the [Layer]

Palette here.

J [Tone Area]Here you can et an alternative drawing color for

the [Tone Area] when the [Color Replacement

Method] in a [Tone Layer] or a [Graycale (8bit)]

[Rater Layer] i et to [Convert to Tone].

K [Opacity]Here you can et the opacity for the alternative

drawing color for the [Tone Area] when the [Diplay

Color] i et to [Color].

L [Output Attribute]Here you can chooe the [Output Attribute], either

[sketch] or [Finih].

M [Sub-Ruler]Here you can elect whether to show (Convert to Layer)

or Hide a [sub-Ruler Layer] that belong to a layer.

N [Color Reduction Method]Here you can elect the [Color Reduction Method]

from [Do Not Reduce Color], [Threhold], [Dither] or

[Convert to Tone].

O [Threshold]set the [Threhold] value when [Color Reduction

Method] i et to [Threhold].

P [Simple View] ButtonHide detailed etting.

Q [Detailed View] Buttonshow detailed etting.

R [Lock Layer] Button

Toggle the layer between locked and unlocked.

※ [selection], [Material] and [Ruler] Tab

Click on the tab to how the correponding etting.

[Simple View]

A

B

C

E

F

G

H

D

I

J

L

M

N

O

P

K

[Advanced View]

AB

C

DJ

M

Q

R

R



Manga Studio

396

Diplay when [Color] i elected in the [Window] menu. Manage the drawing color.

G [Save Color] Button (EX only)[Pick up the current [Drawing Color] in the [Tool]

palette, and ave it to the current [Color set] in

the [Color] palette.

H [Add Color] Button (EX only)Create a new [Color] palette.

I [Delete Color] (EX only)[Delete the elected color from the current [Color

set] in the [Color] palette.

J [Show Menu] Button (EX only)Diplay the color et command menu.

K [Color] Palette (EX only)

Diplay the uable color.

L [Transparent Color Concentration]You can adjut the opacity of the tranparent

color uing either the bar or number.

M [Show Menu] Buttonselect and diplay the color command menu in

the gray, RGB, and HsV lider or area.

Color Palette

I

BA

JH

DCE

F

ML

G

A [Drawing Color: Black][]Diplay the current etting of [Drawing Color:

Black] in the [Tool] palette.

B [Drawing Color: White][Diplay the current etting of [Drawing Color:

White] in the [Tool] palette.

C [Drawing Color: Transparent][Diplay the current etting of [Drawing Color:

Tranparent] in the [Tool] palette.

D [Drawing Color: Tone] (EX only)[Diplay the current etting of [Drawing Color:

Tone] in the [Tool] palette.

E [Show Menu] Button (EX only)[show Tab]・[switche [Lit]

F [Color Set [Show Color Set] Menu (EX only)switche the color et etting.

Diplay when [Action] i elected in the [Window] menu. Manage the action.

Action Palette (EX only)

C [Start Playing Actions]Play or top the action.

D [Delete Action]Delete the elected action.

E [Add Action]Create a new action etting.

F [Show Menu][Action]Diplay the [Action] menu.

G [Implementation Switch Check]Turn ON and OFF the command implementation.

H [Settings Switch Check]Turn ON and OFF the dialog box diplay.

(Only command diplayed in the etting dialog box.)

I [Show Advanced Action Settings]switche the action etting diplay between

develop and ave.

J [Action Layer]Diplay the action a a layer.

A FEB DC

HG

A [Switch Set] Menuswitche the color action etting.

B [Start Recording Actions]

Record action or top action. save to electedaction et.

Diplay when [Cutom Tool] i elected in the [Window] menu. Cutomize the tool.

Customize Tools Palette (EX only)

A [Custom Tools Settings] Buttonswitche the cutom tool etting.

A B

B [Show Menu] ButtonDiplay the command menu.

K

[EX]

BA C

[Debut]

ML

I



User Guide

397

C h a p t e r

14


It i diplayed by electing [Beginner' Aitant] from the [Window] menu.

It i a palette directed at beginner with the tool divided by each work proce uch a [Pen In] or [Tone].

Beginner's Assistant

C

E

A

B

D

K

L

G

F

I

J

A [Layer List]

Diplay the uable layer.

B [Work Selection] tab

Can elect from among the [sketch], [Frame], [Draw], [Tone], and [Character]

tab.

C Tool set

Diplay the tool that can be ued for operation.

D [Tool Properties] display

Diplay the bruh etting of the elected tool.

E [Tool Type] display

Can change the advanced type of tool.

Change the tool ize.

F [Stroke-in] check button

Enable the [stroke-in] etting.

G [Stroke-out] check button

Enable the [stroke-out] etting.

H [Drawing Color]

[Drawing Color] i diplayed.

I [Selection Color]

The elected [Drawing Color] i diplayed.

J [Color Settings] tab

Can elect from [Color set] and [Color Detail] tab.

K [Color] palette

The uable color are diplayed.

M [Set Color] area

Can et the color from [Baic Color] palette.

N [Keyword] button

Material can be looked up through keyword.

N

H



Chapter 15

This chapter is a supplement on troubleshooting, as well as computer and manga terminology.

Step: 01 Troubleshooting 408

Step: 02 Glossary 411

C h

a p t e r

15

A p p e n d i x



Manga Studio

400

Manga Studio

Troubleshooting01

If there seems to be a problem, check the troubleshooting guide below before contacting the User Support Center.

Symptom Cause Countermeasure

Manga Studio does not start.

The correct operating environment may not be in

place.

In order for Manga Studio to work properly, it

is necessary that the OS version, CPU, memory

capacity and the likes of the PC being used satisfy

the operating environment.

Check the specifications of the PC in use, and if the

operating environment is not satisfied, consider

adding parts or taking such other actions.

During the installation of the application, the

administrator or system administrator may not have

logged on...

When installing the application, log in as

administrator or system administrator.

Problems may arise in Manga Studio itself or the

setup due to some system issues.

Double-click the Manga Studio icon while holding

down the [Shift] key to do an initialization startup.When the [Start up and clear the default settings?]

dialog is displayed, clicking the [Yes] button displays

the [Initialization on Startup] dialog, and then, click

the [OK] button with the [Others] check box turned

on.

Manga Studio freezes immediately.

Reinstalling Manga Studio does not fix it...

The correct operating environment may not be in

place.

Check the specifications of the PC in use, and if the

operating environment is not satisfied, consider

adding parts or taking such other actions.

Software, other than those provided as standard in

the OS, may include those that are incompatible with

Manga Studio.

Revert the PC being used to the settings during

shipping, and check whether the issue arises.

Each time Manga Studio is aborted, the remaining

hard disk capacity becomes small.

Manga Studio saves the in-process data. Normally,

this data is automatically deleted upon exit but is

not deleted if normal exit is not possible, and it takes

up hard disk space.

[From the [File] menu, check [Preferences] →

[Memory] → [Virtual Memory Folder Location].

If the file "SWP*.tmp" remains in the system's

temporary folder (e.g. C: \) of the selected drive on

the disk used by virtual memory, manually delete this

file. Note: The file deletion should only be done after

ending Manga Studio.

The story data cannot be stored onto disk.Sufficient free space is not maintained on the hard

disk.

Maintain at least 500 MB of free space on the hard

disk.

Image file cannot be imported.There are image file formats that cannot be imported

by Manga Studio.

Use an image editing software to change the format

of the image file to one that can be imported by

Manga studio.

Even if [Import]→ [TWAIN...] is selected from the

[File] menu, it is not possible to read from scanner.

[TWAIN...] cannot be selected without opening

[Page] of the [Edit] window.

Select [New...] → [Page...] from the [File] menu,

then select [TWAIN...] after opening [Page] tab from

the [Edit] window..

The scanner's power supply may be off, or it is not

properly connected.

Check whether the scanner is properly connected.

Depending on the type of scanner used, it may not

be recognized by the PC if the scanner's power is not

turned on before switching on the PC.



User Guide

401

C h a p t e r

15

A p p e n d i x


Cannot draw to page.

The layer is not selected correctly.Select the layer for drawing.

Depending on the layer, drawing may be disallowed.

[White] or [Transparent] drawing color is not

displayed.

Check the drawing color. If [White] drawing is to be

checked, select [Show Transparent Areas].

The layer's opacity setting is low.

Double-click the layer icon of the [Layers] palette,

and display the [Layers] tab of the [Properties]

palette. (In the case of [Simple View], click the

[Advanced View] button to expand the palette)

Set the [Opacity] to 100%.

The drawing color's opacity setting is low.Select [Color] from the [Window] menu, display the

[Color] palette, and set [Opacity] to 100%.

The selection is on the screen.

Drawing outside the selection is not possible.Clear the selection.

If there are extreme differences between the

drawing's resolution and the size of the displayed

area, they are not reflected on screen.

Do the drawing after the screen is zoomed in byusing the [Zoom] tool.

Non-supported tablet is used. Check the operating environment.

The [Tool Settings] menu on the [Tool Options]

palette of the drawing tool cannot be selected.

The initialization file may not have been properly

imported.

Double-click the Manga Studio icon while holding

down the [Shift] key to do an initialization startup.

When the [Start up and clear the default settings?]

dialog is displayed, clicking the [Yes] button displays

the [Initialization on Startup] dialog, and then, click

the [OK] button with the [Tools] check box turned on.

When tablet is used, the drawing spot is shifted from

that of the mouse cursor.

Depending on the tablet settings, the drawing tool

for pen pressure sensing may cause the drawing to

be shifted.

Check the current [Coordinates Detection Mode]

at the control panels tablet settings. If it is [Mouse

Mode] (Relative Coordinates), change it to [Pen

Mode] (Absolute Coordinates).

When the resolution is changed while working, the

tablet's drawing point may not be correctly obtained.

After uninstalling the driver of the tablet in use

and then restarting the PC, switch the display's

resolution to that of Manga Studio's working

resolution and then reinstall the tablet driver.

When the tablet is used, the cursor cannot be

moved until the edge of screen.The settings of [Mapping] may not be correct.

Adjust the settings of [Mapping] in accordance withthe user manual that comes with the tablet. Check

whether the tablet settings of Windows' [Control

Panel] are recognized correctly.

The selection does not go well by using the

([Rectangle Selection], [Ellipse Selection], [Lasso

Selection], [Polygon Selection]) selection tools.

It is possible that other than [Normal Selection] is

selected at the [Shrink] tab settings of the [Tool

Options] palette.

Select [Tool Options] from the [Window] menu,

and let the settings at the [Shrink] tab be [Normal

Selection].

Tone settings cannot be changed.

Tones that have a key displayed on the icon are

provided as the default for Manga Studio, and

cannot be edited or deleted.

Either paste the tone to a layer, or copy to the tone

folder under the user folder.



Manga Studio

402


Moire occurs at printing and tone areas.

The pasting of tones overlaps and moire also occurs

on screen?

When tones are shifted and pasted with overlap, the

patterns combine and moire occurs.

Moire that occurs at data stage is reflected as it is to

printouts.

Check whether the pasting method for tones fits

with production design.

For correction of tone overlap, select the [Move

Layer] tool and select [Move Tone] at the [Tone

Operations] of the [Tool Options] palette. Moire

can be avoided by shifting the tone position while

checking the angle, lines, and density.

Moire may occur due to the effects of the automatic

adjustment function and printer proprietary setup.

After checking the printer's user manual, redo the

printer setup.

If the [Tone Layer] is rasterized, there is a high

probability of moire occurrence due to loss of vector

format.

Rasterized tone cannot go back to original [Tone

Layer].

Tones should be kept as they are without

rasterization as far as possible.

Faintly expressed areas underwent changes on

printing due to [Gaussian Blur].

Expression that employs gray density is drawn

by [Black and White (2-bit)]. It is expressed by an

assembly of small points of 1 dot on the monitor,

but it may not be recognized by printers with low-

resolution output.

Select the layer, then select [Change Layer Type] from

the [Layers] menu and a dialog is displayed.

Select [Type]: [Raster Layer]/Color Model]: [Gray

(8-bit)]/ [Color Reduction Method]: [Convert to Tone].Select [Blur] or [Blur More] from the [Filter] menu

and execute.

A red Panel Ruler is displayed to text .The text uses a font that is not available on the PC in

use, and the use of an alternative font is indicated.

Check the font used in [Properties] palette of

corresponding text layer from the [Layers] palette,

then check the text font shown in red Panel Ruler,

and either install on the computer in use or change

the corresponding text font to that of a font already

installed on the PC in use.

Troubleshooting information can also be found at the location below.



User Guide

403

C h a p t e r

15

A p p e n d i x

Manga Studio

Glossary02

（PC Terminology)CMYK

Pronounced as "see-wahy-em-key." It is a color model used in printing

expressed by the colors of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.

Dpi

Pronounced as "dee-pee-ahy." Abbreviation for dots per inch.

It determines the quality of screen display and printout. It indicates the

resolution of pictures and characters. The higher the number, the finer and

more beautiful the display can be.

For manga, generally monochrome : 600 dpi, and color : 350 dpi.

FTPPronounced as "ef-tee-pee." Abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol.

It is a type of communications method used when transferring files.

FTP passive mode

One of the FTP data transfer modes.

The client side (own PC) sends a connection to server and transfers the file(s).

Lpi

Pronounced as "el-pee-ahy." Abbreviation for lines per inch.

It determines the printing quality. It indicates the resolution of pictures and

characters. The higher the number, the finer and more beautiful the display can be.

Commercial printing is generally 100~175 lpi.

OS

The basic software that controls the entire computer system.

RGB

Pronounced as "ahr-jee-bee." It is a color model for screen display used by

monitor and scanner, and it is expressed by red, green and blue.

TWAIN

Pronounced as "tweyn."

It is a general-purpose input method for image input devices such as scanner

and digital camera. If TWAIN is supported, the software can directly importimages from the scanner.

Application

Application software that works on top of the OS to achieve the user's

objective.

Uninstall

Deletes the software and reverts to the conditions prior to installation.

Install

Copies to PC and sets to ready-to-use conditions.

Cursor(pointer)

Mark that indicates the position for user input on the screen.

Resolution

A term that indicates the granularity of the image. A larger value means the

image granularity can be expressed more finely.

Gradation

It indicates the change in color gradation in numerical value.

Extension

In Windows file name, the character string of 3~4 characters that indicates the

file type is the rightmost portion separated by '.'(period). Double-clicking the

file with the extension starts up a corresponding application that opens the

file. The creator in Macintosh has similar roles, and the extension is also found

in Macintosh nowadays in order to have file compatibility.

Cut

It deletes the contents of the selected area from the window and paste to

clipboard.

Clipboard

The place where the copied or cut contents are stored temporarily.

Grayscale

The expression format of image data with intermediate tones expressed by

black and white.

Diffusion

A type of dither in which gray is expressed by dot density.

It is a conversion method that assigns density errors to surrounding pixels.

Copy

Reproduction. The [Copy] command, compared to [Cut] and [Paste], pastes the

contents of the selected area from the window to the clipboard. The original

content that is copied remains on screen.

Threshold

A gradation value that is the reference when converting a gray image to the 2

values of black and white.

As it gives rise to reaction, it is a necessary environmental value.

Lines

A term that indicates the granularity of printing. A larger value means the

printing granularity can be expressed more finely.

Dialog 1 inch 1 inch

dpi lpi



Manga Studio

404

A window in conversation format for carrying out installation or respective

setups.

Directory

A visualized hierarchical structure. The [Root Directory] is the highest hierarchy

in the hierarchical structure.

Dither

Falsely expressing gray at a fine cluster of black.

Default

The initialization settings of the software.

Dot

A square dot that is the smallest unit forming a digital image. It does not

include color or color depth. It may be referred to simply as a "dot".

Driver

The software that acts as an intermediary when connecting to hardware.

Paste

Pasting the content of the clipboard to the window that is currently in use.

Pixel

A square dot that is the smallest unit forming a digital image. It does not

include color or color depth.

File

A collection of program or data.

Folder

A place where files are assembled, grouped, and organized.

Freeze

Abnormality occurred in the system, and the screen is not working any more.

Vector image

Also called drawing image. It is an image shape expressed by point

coordinates and the joining line or the plane parameters. Even if the image is

transformed by zooming in and out, the image quality fitting the resolution is

maintained.

Multi-user OS

An OS that allows multiple users without mutual interference. For example,

Windows Vista or Mac OS X. The installation of applications can only be done

by users with system administrator privilege.

Monochrome binary tone

The expression format of image data without intermediate tones expressed by

black and white.

Utility

Software that supplements inadequate parts of OS or application.

Raster image

Also called bitmap image. An image format expressed by a collection of small

dots. It is not suitable for scaling and transform since zooming in causes

jaggedness (indentation) to be seen on the outline and zooming out causes

information to be lost.

Login/logout

For OS that can be used by multiple users, the input of user name and

password to open one's own desktop.

(Main Image Formats)

BMP

Pronounces as B-M-P. It refers to bitmap image.

This is the Windows standard image format. The resolution cannot be set. The

extension is BMP.

PICT

Pronounced as "pikt."

One of the standard image formats of Macintosh (Mac OS 9). It is seldom used

in recent times. The extension is PCT.

EPS

Pronounced as "ee-pee-es."

Image format that is widely used in the pasting of images for print DTP. It allows

fast editing by using low-resolution data on screen and allows high-capability

output by using high-resolution data when printing. The extension is EPS.

TIFF

Pronounced as "tif."

Image format that is widely used in the pasting of images for print DTP. The

extension is TIF.

TGA

Pronounced as "tee-jee-ey." Also called TARGA.

It is an image format for use in videos. It is possible to specify transparent area.

For the image compression method, it supports only lossless compression that

can completely restore the or iginal information. The resolution cannot be set.

PDF

Pronounced as "pee-dee-ef."

Document file format for compresses ion to make the file's data space small.

The extension is PDF.

PSDPronounced as "pee-es-dee."

Image format of Adobe Company's Photoshop graphics software that is

practically the global standard for design. It has layer functionality. The

extension is PSD.

GIF

Pronounced as "jee-ahy-ef."

Image format that is pervasive in internet use. It is suitable for flat image such

as animated picture. The extension is GIF.

JPG

Pronounced as "jey-pee-jee."

Image format that is pervasive in internet use. It is suitable for images that is fullof gradation such as a photo. Commonly used at 72 dpi. The extension is JPG.

PNG

Pronounced as "pee-en-jee."

The third image format for use in internet, it combines the merits of GIF and

JPG. It is possible to designate transparent area. For the image compression

method, it supports lossless compression that can completely restore the

original information. The extension is PNG.



User Guide

405

C h a p t e r

15

A p p e n d i x

(Printing Terminology)

ICC profile

Pronounced as "ahy-see-see-proh-fahyl."

A file that is created based on the definitions of the International Color

Consortium so that colors are reproduced accurately on different devices.

It describes the area and reproduction properties of the respective colors that

are present.

PostScript font

An outline font that enables the printing or screen display of beautiful

characters without jaggedness even in large sizes. Due to its high price and

high resolution, it is mainly directed at and pervasive in commercial use. The

font is required in printers.

TrueType font

An outline font that enables the printing or screen display of beautiful

characters without jaggedness even in large sizes. Due to its low price and low

resolution, it is mainly directed at and pervasive in personal use. The font is not

required in printers.

*Manga Studio can use whichever of the TrueType font or PostScript font aslong as the usage environment is present on the computer.

Antigue-Gothic style

A general style common in commercial manga magazines that displays

Japanese katakana using the "Antigue style" and Japanese kanji using the

"Gothic style."

Gothic style

A style in which the lengthwise and breadth wise strokes that form the

characters are generally of uniform width.

Style

A character set in which the entire style is of unified design.

Tone jump

An appearance in which there is no continuity of gradation in the gradation

area of the image resulting in a boundary of striped pattern.

It is prone to happen in the event of scanner failure or extreme correction.

Font

Style set for computer use.

Meicho style

The start or end of the lines forming the characters is of stressed form so as to

allow for the pen's start of writing or end of writing,

Moire

A new pattern arising from the overlap of continuous patterns, and it is alsocalled interference fringe.

It occurs due to overlapped pasting of tones or shifting with resolution.

Rendering intent

A conversion method for maintaining the synchronization of two different

color spaces.There are 4 types, namely [Perceptual], [Saturation], [Relative colorimetric], and

[Absolute colorimetric].

(Manga Related)

Handwritten character

Not through sound imitation or movable printing, but the character is actually

written with ink(pen).

Main line

The pen’s stroke-in line.

Script

The words spoken by the characters.

White fill Bringing out the white at black-inking area of characters and pictures.

White edge

Bringing out white at edge of script or drawn characters.

Screen tone/ tone

The sheet where pattern is printed on cellophane. This is cut and pasted to the

manga's background.

Bleed

The image is drawn until the cutting position (juts out from the cutting line

until the bleed-marks line) of the book.

Head and tail bands/ gutter/ thumb edge

The top part of a manga is the head band while the bottom part is the tail

band. The gutter is in the binding direction while the thumb edge is in the

opposite direction of binding.

Binding

The opening direction of .

For normal Japanese manga with the script written vertically... [Right-hand

binding]

For western manga or numerals, and science-oriented manga with the scriptwritten horizontally...[Left-hand binding]

Cover page

The beginning page. Also called the title page.

Name

Meaning 1: A simple line drawn with pencil as guide prior to putting in the

pen. Meaning 2: The script inside a balloon.

Meaning 3: Decision on the flow of the entire story.

Pagination

Page number or Panel number.

Balloon A script-containing Panel Ruler when characters are talking.

Inking

Fill with black.

White

Whiten the error location or location to be effectively made white.

Spread

Assembling the 2 pages at left and right as one continuous layout (Panel).

Ruby

The Japanese furigana cast at Japanese kanji and the likes.



Manga Studio

406



User Guide

407

C h a p t e r

15

A p p e n d i x



Alphanumeric

1 Line Panel...........................................................................................136

1 Point Perspective ................................................................................121

2DLT Rendering Folder ..........................................................................150

2DLT Rendering Function .....................................................................292

2DLT Settings .......................................................................................295

2D Rotate ..............................................................................................284


2 Point Symmetry Ruler ......................................................................... 128

3D Frame Tool ......................................................................................304

3DLT Rendering Folder ..........................................................................150

3DLT Rendering Function .....................................................................322

3DLT Settings .......................................................................................324

3D Object Auto Adjust ..........................................................................308

3D Object Ground ................................................................................ 308

3D Object Move ................................................................................... 306

3D Object Reset ................................................................................... 309

3D Object Rotate .................................................................................. 307

3D Object Show/Hide ...........................................................................312

3D Object Size ......................................................................................307

3D Object Space ................................................................................... 306

3D Object Space Rulers ........................................................................316

3D Preview Layer .................................................................................. 150

3D Scene File ........................................................................................303

3D Selection Tool .................................................................................. 305

3D Sketch Figures ................................................................................. 318

3D Sketching ........................................................................................300

3D Sketching Function .........................................................................300

3D Workspace Folder ............................................................................ 150






8-bit Selection .......................................................................................169


A

Action Palette........................................................................................396

Actions .................................................................................................. 372

Action settings dialog ..........................................................................375

Active Display ......................................................................................313

Actual Pixels .........................................................................................358

Add Layer to Selection ..........................................................................189

Adjust by Anchor Point ..........................................................................119

Airbrush .................................................................................................. 91

Align Rulers...........................................................................................143

Anchor Point .........................................................................................137

B

balloon .................................................................................................. 405

Balloon material ..................................................................................... 59

Basic frame .......................................................................................... , 28

Beginner's Assistant .................................................................................. 8

Bezier Curve Ruler ................................................................................. 115

Biaxial Line Symmetry Ruler ..................................................................128

binding .................................................................................................. 405

bleed ..................................................................................................... 405

Blurring Tool ..........................................................................................243Blur the Border ......................................................................................182

BMP ...................................................................................................... 404

Border Selection .................................................................................... 177

Both-Sides Display ............................................................................... 315

Box ....................................................................................................... 313

Browse externally ................................................................................ 367

Brush Control ..........................................................................................81

Brush Control Dialog ............................................................................... 77

Brush material ........................................................................................61

Bug Glasses Tool ................................................................................... 356

C

Calligraphy Pen Tool ................................................................................ 88

Camera Operation ................................................................................ 310Camera Rotation .................................................................................. 311

Camera Selection ................................................................................. 310

Center Point(Perspective Ruler) .............................................................122

Change Brush Shape Menu ..................................................................... 92

Change Corner Status of Selected Points .............................................. 140

Change Layer Type ................................................................................158

Change Line Color to Drawing Color .................................................... 186

Change Pattern Brush Style ..................................................................... 91

Change title information ........................................................................38

Change Tool Option Settings] Dialog....................................................... 77

Changing the Layer Pallette Color .........................................................163

Changing the Order of Layers ............................................................... 162

Character material ......................................................................... 60, 368Classic style.............................................................................................14

Clear Area Outside Selection ......................................................... 186, 183

Clear Page .............................................................................................. 34

Clear (Selection) .................................................................................... 186

Clear Selection .............................................................................. 186, 182

clipboard ...............................................................................................403

Close Curve ...........................................................................................118

Close page .............................................................................................33

Close Path ............................................................................................... 95

Close Selected Ruler .............................................................................. 138

CMYK .................................................................................................... 403

Color Area Selection .............................................................................. 181

Color Mixing Tool .................................................................................. 246

Color Mode ...........................................................................................169

Color Palette ........................................................................................396

Color profile ............................................................................................16

Color Set ................................................................................................. 75

Color setting dialog ................................................................................ 53

Color Settings Dialog .............................................................................. 75

Compatibility ..........................................................................................23

Compatible 3D Data ............................................................................. 302

Concentric Circle Ruler ..........................................................................127

Continuous scan .................................................................................... 48

Control Pattern Materials Dialog ............................................................. 92

Control Point .........................................................................................137

Convert Layers to Folder ....................................................................... 157

Convert Layer to Selection .................................................................... 189

Convert Selection to Panel Folder.......................................................... 182

Copy ...................................................................................................... 226

Copy and Paste .....................................................................................186

Copy Rulers ...........................................................................................137

Copy to Another Application .................................................................227

Correction ............................................................................................... 80

cover page ............................................................................................405

cpg ..............................................................................................................

Create a closed curve. ........................................................................... 118

Create a continuous curve. .................................................................... 116

Create a Curve with a Corner ................................................................ 117

Create new dialog (set dimensions) .......................................................28

Create new → Page (Page template) .....................................................26

Create new → Page (Set dimensions) ....................................................26

Create new style dialog .......................................................................338



Create new → Title (Page template) ......................................................24

Create new → Title (Set dimensions) ..................................................... 24

Create New Tone ................................................................................... 186

Create Path Tool .................................................................................... 116

cursor(pointer) ...................................................................................... 403

Cursor(Preferences) .................................................................................11

Curved Speed Lines Ruler ...................................................................... 125

D

default .................................................................................................. 404Delete Layer ..........................................................................................156

Delete Layer from Selection .................................................................. 189

Delete page ............................................................................................34

Delete Selected Points ........................................................................... 138

Delete Vector ...........................................................................................83

diffusion ................................................................................................ 403

directory ................................................................................................ 404

Display Adjustment .............................................................................. 312

Display Screen .......................................................................................354

Distance Between 3D Object and Camera ............................................310

Distort ................................................................................................... 237

Distortion Tool .......................................................................................239

Divide Page .............................................................................................64Dodging Tool .........................................................................................247

dot ........................................................................................................ 404

Drawing .................................................................................................. 65

Drawing Color: Black .............................................................................. 68

Drawing Color: Color............................................................................... 73

Drawing Color: Gray................................................................................ 70

Drawing Color: Transparent ..................................................................... 68

Drawing Color: White .............................................................................. 68

Drawing Format ...................................................................................... 66

E

Edit Color ................................................................................................ 75

Edit Menu ............................................................................................379

Edit Polygon Dialog ................................................................................. 77

Edit Window .........................................................................................388

Ellipse Selection Tool ............................................................................. 170

Ellipse Tool ............................................................................................102

Eraser Tool ............................................................................................... 82

Expand Panel Ruler ............................................................................... 142

Expand Selection ................................................................................... 186

Export ..................................................................................................... 50

extension ..............................................................................................403

F

file .........................................................................................................404

File Menu .............................................................................................378

Files ......................................................................................................... 21

Fill Selection ..........................................................................................183

Fill Selection in Drawing Color .............................................................. 184

Fill Tool .................................................................................................... 94

Filter Menu ...........................................................................................385

Filter settings .........................................................................................43

Filter settings tab ................................................................................... 45

Finish Attribute ......................................................................................147

Fisheye Lens .........................................................................................290

Flip Horizontal .......................................................................................238

Flip Horizontal ......................................................................................314

Flip Vertical ...........................................................................................238

Focus Line Layer ....................................................................................147

folder .................................................................................................... 404

Folder Path(Preferences) .........................................................................16

Four Views ............................................................................................327

freeze .................................................................................................... 404

G

grayscale ...............................................................................................403

Grid ...................................................................................................... 324

Grid Layer .............................................................................................152

H

handwritten character ........................................................................... 405

head and tail bands / gutter / thumb edge ............................................ 405

Header ................................................................................................... 28

Help Menu ...........................................................................................387

History function .................................................................................... 371

History Palette ......................................................................................395

Horizontal Grid ..................................................................................... 315

Horizontalize .........................................................................................143

How to read the story editor ................................................................ 342

I

IccProfile ........................................................................................... 16, 53

ICC profile .............................................................................................405

Image export dialog ............................................................................... 51

Image file (export) ................................................................................. 50

Image file (Import) ................................................................................ 42

Image Layer ..........................................................................................147

Import .................................................................................................... 40

Importing text ......................................................................................339

In.............................................................................................................80

Infinity ................................................................................................... 123

Initialize startup ........................................................................................9

inking .................................................................................................... 405

Inner dimensions .................................................................................... 28

Insert menu ..........................................................................................375

Insert new page ..................................................................................... 34

Inside Selection ..................................................................................... 176

install .................................................................................................... 403

Invert Screen .........................................................................................357

J

JPEG setting dialog ................................................................................ 53

L

Ley input ................................................................................................. 10

Lasso Selection Tool .............................................................................. 171

Layer ..................................................................................................... 145

Layer Division Display ........................................................................... 163

Layer file (Import) .................................................................................. 41

Layer Folder...........................................................................................150

Layer Menu ..........................................................................................383

Layer Move Tool .................................................................................... 154

Layer Pallette ........................................................................................162

Layer(Preferences) ................................................................................... 13

Layer (Save material) ............................................................................. 57

Layer Selection ......................................................................................155

Layer Selection Tool ............................................................................... 153

Layer settings .........................................................................................43

Layer settings tab ................................................................................... 45

Line Edit Tool .........................................................................................234

Line Joining Tool ....................................................................................230



Line Lever Tool ......................................................................................232

Line Tool .................................................................................................. 98

Line Width Correction Tool ....................................................................233

M

Magic Marker Tool .................................................................................. 84

Magic Wand Tool ................................................................................... 173

Magnification Angle(Preferences) .......................................................... 12

main line ...............................................................................................405

Make single page ................................................................................... 36Masking Layer .......................................................................................149

Material ...............................................................................................366

Materials Palette .................................................................................. 394

Memory(Preferences) .............................................................................. 15

Memory saver mode .............................................................................. 14

Merge Down Layer ................................................................................ 161

Merge Layers ........................................................................................161

Merge Selected Vertex Point .................................................................139

Merge Two Panel Rulers ........................................................................143

Mesh Transform .................................................................................... 238

Mincho style.......................................................................................... 405

Modify paper guide ................................................................................ 39

moire.....................................................................................................405Move and Transform ............................................................................. 186

Move and Transform ............................................................................ 299

Multibrush .............................................................................................. 92

N

New Layer .............................................................................................155

O

OBJ ....................................................................................................... 302

Offset ..................................................................................................... 25

Offset width ...........................................................................................28

Open ...................................................................................................... 32

Open file ................................................................................................ 32

Open page .............................................................................................33

Operation with the 3D Manipulator .....................................................309

Options(Preferences) ............................................................................... 16

Outline Selection ................................................................................... 185

Outline Setting ..................................................................................... 296

P

Page Bleed ............................................................................................142

Page File ................................................................................................. 22

Page file (Import) ................................................................................... 40

Page information .................................................................................... 36

Page list ................................................................................................. 36

Page number ..........................................................................................29

Page(Preferences) ................................................................................... 10

Page (Save material) .............................................................................. 56

Page settings ..........................................................................................62

Page settings dialog ............................................................................... 63

Page template ........................................................................................24

Palm Tool ...............................................................................................354

Panel Creation Tool ............................................................................... 166

Panel Folder .................................................................................. 132, 135

Panel Ruler ............................................................................................131

Panel Ruler Cut Tool .............................................................................. 136

Panel Ruler Divisions .............................................................................141

Panel Ruler Layer .................................................................................. 132

Paper ......................................................................................................38

Paper size ............................................................................................... 28

Parallel Lines Ruler ................................................................................126

Parent/Child Relationship .....................................................................303

paste ..................................................................................................... 404

Paste ..................................................................................................... 228

Paste Color Opaque .............................................................................. 229

Paste Rulers........................................................................................... 137

Paste White Transparent ........................................................................228

Pattern Brush Tool ................................................................................... 90

PDF setting dialog .................................................................................. 53

Pencil Tool ............................................................................................... 86Pen Pressure ............................................................................................81

Pen's Gradient.........................................................................................81

Pen Tool................................................................................................... 78

Perspective ............................................................................................237

Perspective Operation (Camera) ........................................................... 311

Perspective Operation (Parent/Child Relationship) ............................... 319

Perspective Ruler ................................................................................... 121

Perspective Ruler .................................................................................. 317

pff ...........................................................................................................17

Photo Comic .........................................................................................132

Photoshop file (Import) .........................................................................46

Photoshop setting dialog .......................................................................53

pixel ...................................................................................................... 404Point(Units) .............................................................................................16

Polygon Tool ..........................................................................................102

Polyline Selection Tool ...........................................................................171

Polyline Tool ..........................................................................................100

Pose ..................................................................................................... 303

Pose Selection ...................................................................................... 319

Position adjustment tab .........................................................................44

Posterization ........................................................................................ 298

Preferences .............................................................................................10

Previous Filter ...................................................................................... 299

Q

Quick Mask ...........................................................................................191

Quick Select ..........................................................................................192

R

Raster detailed settings dialog ............................................................... 52

Raster Drawing ....................................................................................... 66

raster image ..........................................................................................404

Rasterize ...............................................................................................158

Raster Layer ..........................................................................................147

Raster Layer + (Panel Ruler) .................................................................. 131

Raster + (Panel Ruler) ...........................................................................134

Rectangle Selection Tool .......................................................................170

Rectangle Tool .......................................................................................102

Redo command .................................................................................... 370

Reduce Selection ........................................................................... 186, 180

Rendering intent ..................................................................................... 16

Rendering Settings ............................................................................... 295

resolution ..............................................................................................403

Reverse Layer ........................................................................................149

Ribbon .................................................................................................... 91

Rotate ................................................................................................... 237

Rotate Pen Axis ....................................................................................... 81

Rotate Screen ........................................................................................357

Rotation Axis ........................................................................................303

Rotation Tool .........................................................................................355

Rubi settings ........................................................................................333

Rubi settings dialog ............................................................................. 335

ruby ....................................................................................................... 405



Ruler ..................................................................................................... 105

Ruler Handles ........................................................................................114

S

Save ....................................................................................................... 30

Save all .................................................................................................. 32

Save as compatible type ........................................................................30

Save copy ............................................................................................... 30

Save page template ............................................................................... 55

Save pattern as balloon material ........................................................... 59Save pattern as brush material .............................................................. 61

Save pattern as character material ......................................................... 60

Save pattern as tone material ................................................................ 57

Save title with different name ................................................................ 30

Save with different name .......................................................................31

Saving a Pose ....................................................................................... 321

Saving a Scene ..................................................................................... 321

Saving Motions (Series of Poses) ..........................................................320

Saving Poses/Scenes ............................................................................ 320

Scan ........................................................................................................ 47

Scanning (Preferences) .......................................................................... 14

screen tone / tone .................................................................................405

script ..................................................................................................... 405Select Again ..........................................................................................182

Select All ............................................................................................... 182

Select and insert page ............................................................................ 35

Select Enclosed Lines ............................................................................ 193

Selection ............................................................................................... 167

Selection Launcher ................................................................................ 186

Selection Layer ...................................................................................... 151

Selection Menu .................................................................................... 382

Shade ................................................................................................... 325

Sharpen Angle .........................................................................................79

Sharpen Selected Vertex Point ...............................................................139

SHD ...................................................................................................... 302

Shortcut settings .................................................................................... 18

Show All ................................................................................................ 358

Show Center Line .................................................................................... 67

Show Grid .............................................................................................362

Show Guide........................................................................................... 362

Show/Hide Layer ................................................................................... 162

Show Measurement Scale ..................................................................... 361

Show Menu ..........................................................................................381

Show Page Numbers ............................................................................. 363

Show Pagination ................................................................................... 363

Show Print Guide and Basic Frame ....................................................... 361

Show Story / Author Info ....................................................................... 363

Show Transparent Area .........................................................................359

Shrink Selection .................................................................................... 176

Shutdown.................................................................................................. 8

Single Color.............................................................................................73

Sketch Attribute .................................................................................... 147

Sketch layer ............................................................................................43

Sketch Layer ..........................................................................................148

Smooth ................................................................................................ 324

Snap ...................................................................................................... 109

Snap to.................................................................................................. 109

Special Ruler .........................................................................................121

Speed Line Layer ................................................................................... 147

Speed Lines Ruler .................................................................................. 124

Speed Lines Tool .................................................................................... 241

spread ................................................................................................... 405

Stamp......................................................................................................91

Stamping Tool ....................................................................................... 244

Standard Interface .................................................................................... 8

Standard resolution ................................................................................ 28

Startup ...................................................................................................... 8

STC ....................................................................................................... 302

Stitch position, change start page .......................................................... 38

Story editor ..........................................................................................341

Story Menu ..........................................................................................380

style ...................................................................................................... 405

Style ........................................................................................................ 91

Style settings ........................................................................................ 336

T

Tablet PC ................................................................................................. 15

Tablet(Preferences) .................................................................................. 15

Text dialog ...........................................................................................343

Text Folder.............................................................................................150

Text functions .......................................................................................330

Text Layer ..............................................................................................149

Text settings .........................................................................................332

Text tool ...............................................................................................330

Text units ................................................................................................ 16

Texture ................................................................................................. 324

Texture Display ..................................................................................... 314

Texture Mapping .................................................................................. 302TIFF setting dialog .................................................................................. 53

Title file .................................................................................................. 22

Title information dialog ..........................................................................29

Tone detailed settings dialog ................................................................. 52

tone jump.............................................................................................. 405

Tone Layer .............................................................................................149

Tone material .........................................................................................57

Tone Settings ........................................................................................299

To next page ..........................................................................................33

Tool Bar ................................................................................................ 389

Tool Options Palette ................................................................................ 76

Tool Palette .............................................................................................76

Tool(Preferences)..................................................................................... 14

Tool Settings Menu ................................................................................. 77

Tools Options Palette ...........................................................................391

Tools Palette .........................................................................................390

U

Undoing commands ............................................................................. 370

Undo Levels ............................................................................................11

uninstall ................................................................................................ 403

Unit ........................................................................................................ 28

Use character material .........................................................................368

User data folder ......................................................................................16

V

Vanishing Point Layer ............................................................................147

Vanishing Point(Perspective Ruler) ........................................................ 122

Vector Absorption ................................................................................... 79

Vector Drawing ....................................................................................... 66

vector image .........................................................................................404

Vector Layer ..........................................................................................148

Vector Layer Change Settings Dialog ....................................................159

Vertical Grid .........................................................................................315

Verticalize .............................................................................................143

Virtual memory ....................................................................................... 15

W

white ..................................................................................................... 405



white edge ............................................................................................405

white fill ................................................................................................ 405

Window Menu ..................................................................................... 386

Wire Frame ...........................................................................................313

Word Balloon Layer ............................................................................... 149

Z

Zoom..................................................................................................... 237

Zoom Out ..............................................................................................237

manga studio user manual

Documents